WO2014101008A1 - Ptt communication method, server, terminal and system - Google Patents

Ptt communication method, server, terminal and system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2014101008A1
WO2014101008A1 PCT/CN2012/087555 CN2012087555W WO2014101008A1 WO 2014101008 A1 WO2014101008 A1 WO 2014101008A1 CN 2012087555 W CN2012087555 W CN 2012087555W WO 2014101008 A1 WO2014101008 A1 WO 2014101008A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
terminal
predefined area
message
ptt communication
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2012/087555
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
文华
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2012/087555 priority Critical patent/WO2014101008A1/en
Priority to CN201280025003.XA priority patent/CN103843373B/en
Publication of WO2014101008A1 publication Critical patent/WO2014101008A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W4/00Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
    • H04W4/06Selective distribution of broadcast services, e.g. multimedia broadcast multicast service [MBMS]; Services to user groups; One-way selective calling services

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present invention relate to communication technologies, and in particular, to a communication method, a server, a terminal, and a system. Background technique
  • Push To Talk (referred to as PTT) communication is a half-duplex communication method between multiple members belonging to the same group.
  • the basic form is as follows: When a user presses the PTT button on the terminal, the media stream can be transmitted to the members of the same group through the communication network; after the PTT button is released, the media stream stops transmitting.
  • PTT communication in a predefined area means that users in the same group can only perform PTT communication in a predefined area.
  • the characteristics are: When a group is performing PTT communication, if a group member moves to the group Outside the predefined area of the group, he will exit the PTT communication; if a member belonging to the group enters the predefined area of the group, he will join the PTT communication.
  • GSM-R Mobile Communications for Railways
  • MGW Mobile Switching Centre
  • HLR Home Location Register
  • BSC Base Station Controller
  • BTS Base Transceiver Station
  • Embodiments of the present invention provide a PTT communication method, server, terminal, and system to reduce implementation cost of PTT communication in a predefined area.
  • a PTT communication method including: a server receiving a PTT communication establishment request sent by a terminal, where the PTT communication establishment request carries a group identifier and a cell identifier of a cell where the terminal is currently located; Determining the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier according to the group identifier; determining whether the terminal is located according to the predefined area information that is queried and the cell identifier of the current cell of the terminal In the predefined area of the group; according to the judgment result, the PTT communication establishment response is sent to the terminal.
  • the sending, according to the determining result, the PTT communication setup response to the terminal includes: if the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group Transmitting a PTT communication setup response to the terminal, where the PTT communication setup response carries the group identifier, the predefined area information of the group, where the PTT communication setup response includes PTT communication established.
  • Message or PTT communication allows the establishment of a message.
  • a second possible implementation manner of the first aspect if the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group, sending the terminal to the terminal
  • the PTT communication establishment response specifically includes: if the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier is established, sending a PTT communication established message to the terminal; if the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier is not established And sending a PTT communication permission establishment message to the terminal.
  • the method further includes: The other terminal of the group sends a paging message, where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group; and the other terminals that receive the group send through the wireless IP network.
  • a paging response message where the paging response message carries the group identity of the group, and the paging response message is that the other terminal is determined to be currently in the predefined area according to the cell identity of the cell in which the current cell is located. Sent within and after.
  • the sending, according to the determining result, the PTT communication setup response to the terminal includes: if the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group In addition, a PTT communication setup response is sent to the terminal, where the PTT communication setup response includes a message that the PTT communication setup fails.
  • any one of the first to fourth possible implementation manners of the first aspect in a fifth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, when any terminal of the group leaves When the predefined area of the group is used, the method further includes: receiving a departure sent by the leaving terminal a message of the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the leaving terminal and the group identity of the group; and the left terminal is moved out of the PTT communication of the group.
  • any one of the first to fifth possible implementation manners of the first aspect in a sixth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, when any terminal of the group enters When the predefined area of the group is used, the method further includes: receiving a message that is sent by the ingress terminal to enter a predefined area, where the message that enters the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the incoming terminal and a group identity of the group; adding the entered terminal to a PTT communication of the group.
  • any one of the first to sixth possible implementation manners of the first aspect in a seventh possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes: receiving, by the terminal that wants to end PPT communication, a call termination request; sending a call end message to all terminals of the group, so that all terminals of the group delete the Predefined area information for the group.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a PTT communication method, including: a terminal sending a PTT communication establishment request to a server, where the PTT communication establishment request carries a group identifier and a cell identifier of a cell where the terminal is currently located; Determining, by the server, a PTT communication establishment response, where the PTT communication establishment response is that the server determines, according to the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier, and the cell identifier of the current cell of the terminal, Located in a predefined area of the group and sent according to the judgment result; determining whether to join the PPT communication according to the PPT communication establishment response.
  • the PTT communication setup response is sent when the server determines that the terminal is located outside a predefined area of the group, where The PTT communication setup response includes a message that the PTT communication setup failed.
  • the PTT communication setup response is sent when the server determines that the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group.
  • the PTT communication setup response includes a PTT communication established message or a PTT communication permission establishment message, and the PTT communication establishment response carries the group identifier of the group, and the predefined area information of the group.
  • the method further includes: saving the group Predefined area information.
  • the method when the terminal moves, the method further includes: moving, according to the saved predefined area information, the terminal Determining, by the cell identifier of the cell, whether the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group; when the determination result is yes, sending a message leaving the predefined area to the server, where the message leaving the predefined area carries Determining the terminal identifier and the group identifier of the terminal, so that the server moves the terminal out of the PTT communication of the group.
  • the method further includes: when the terminal When moving again, determining whether the terminal enters a predefined area of the group according to the saved predefined area information and the cell identifier of the terminal moving to the cell; when the determination result is yes, sending the advancement to the server Defining a message of the area, where the message entering the predefined area carries a terminal identifier and a group identifier, so that the server joins the terminal to the group
  • the method further includes: receiving, sending, by the server a call end message, the call end message carrying the group identifier of the group; deleting the locally saved predefined area information of the group.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a PTT communication method, including: determining, by a server, a PTT communication that allows a group to be established; and transmitting, to the terminal of the group, a paging message of a PTT communication of the group, where the The call message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group.
  • the paging response message sent by the terminal of the group is received, where the paging response message carries the group identifier of the group,
  • the paging response message is sent by the terminal after determining that the terminal is currently within the predefined area according to the cell identity of the current cell of the current cell.
  • the third aspect or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect in a second possible implementation manner of the third aspect, when any terminal of the group leaves a predefined area of the group And the message that is sent by the leaving terminal to leave the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the leaving terminal and the group identifier of the group; The leaving terminal moves out of the group's PTT communication.
  • the method includes: receiving a message that is sent by a terminal of the group to enter a predefined area, where the message entering the predefined area carries a terminal identifier and a group identifier; and the terminal is added to the PTT communication of the group.
  • any one of the first to third possible implementation manners of the third aspect in a fourth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, when any terminal of the group When the PPT communication is to be ended, the method further includes: receiving a call end request sent by the terminal that wants to end the PPT communication; sending a call end message to all terminals of the group, so that all the terminals of the group delete the group Predefined area information for the group.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a PTT communication method, including: receiving, by a terminal, a paging message of a PTT communication of a group sent by a server, where the paging message carries a group identifier of the group and the Pre-defined area information of the group; corresponding to the group identifier, pre-defined area information of the group is saved.
  • the fourth aspect in a first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, determining, according to the cell identifier of the cell where the terminal is currently located, and the predefined area information, whether the current location is within the predefined area of the group. And if the terminal is currently located in the predefined area of the group, sending a paging response message to the server, where the paging response message carries the group identifier of the group.
  • the method further includes: determining, according to the saved predefined area information and the cell identifier of the terminal moving to the cell, whether the terminal enters a predefined area of the group; when the terminal enters a predefined area of the group Sending a message to the server to enter a predefined area, where the message entering the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group, so that the server will The terminal joins the PTT communication of the group.
  • the method further includes: Preserving the predefined area information and the cell identity of the terminal moving to the cell determining whether the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group; when the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group, to the server Sending a message leaving the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identity of the group, so that the server moves the terminal out of the PTT of the group Communication.
  • the method further includes: receiving a call end message sent by the server, where the call end message carries a group identifier of the group; deleting pre-defined area information of the group saved locally .
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a server, including: a receiving module, configured to receive a PTT communication establishment request sent by a terminal, where the PTT communication establishment request carries a group identifier and a cell identifier of a cell where the terminal is currently located a querying module, configured to query, according to the group identifier, predefined area information of a group corresponding to the group identifier, and a determining module, configured to: according to the predefined area information that is queried and the current cell of the terminal a cell identifier, determining whether the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group; and sending, by the sending module, a PTT communication establishment response to the terminal according to the determination result.
  • a receiving module configured to receive a PTT communication establishment request sent by a terminal, where the PTT communication establishment request carries a group identifier and a cell identifier of a cell where the terminal is currently located
  • a querying module configured to query, according to the group identifier, predefined area information
  • the PTT communication establishment response when the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group, the PTT communication establishment response includes a PTT communication established message or a PTT The communication allows a message to be established, and the PTT communication setup response carries the group identifier, the predefined area information of the group.
  • the sending module is specifically configured to: if the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier is established And sending a PTT communication established message to the terminal; if the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier is not established, sending a PTT communication permission establishment message to the terminal.
  • the sending module is further configured to: if the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier is not established And sending a paging message to the other terminal of the group, where the paging message carries the group identifier and the predefined area information of the group; the receiving module is further configured to: receive the group a paging response message sent by another terminal of the group, where the paging response message carries the group The group identifier, the paging response message is sent by the other terminal after determining that the current location is within the predefined area according to the cell identity of the cell in which the current cell is located.
  • the sending module is specifically configured to: send the PTT communication to the terminal if the terminal is located outside a predefined area of the group Establishing a response, wherein the PTT communication establishment response includes a message that the PTT communication establishment fails.
  • any one of the first to fourth possible implementation manners of the fifth aspect in a fifth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, when any terminal of the group leaves
  • the receiving module is further configured to receive a message that is sent by the leaving terminal to leave a predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal of the leaving terminal Identifying and group identification of the group;
  • the method further includes: a removal module, configured to move the leaving terminal out of the group of PTT communications.
  • a removal module configured to move the leaving terminal out of the group of PTT communications.
  • any one of the first to the sixth possible implementation manners of the fifth aspect in a seventh possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, is further configured to receive, by the terminal that is to end the PPT communication, a call termination request, where the sending module is further configured to send a call end message to all terminals of the group, so that All terminals of the group delete the predefined area information of the group.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a terminal, including: a sending module, configured to send a PTT communication establishment request to a server, where the PTT communication establishment request carries a group identifier and a cell identifier of a cell where the terminal is currently located; a receiving module, configured to receive a PTT communication setup response sent by the server, where the PTT communication setup response is a predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier by the server, and a cell of a cell where the terminal is currently located And determining, by the processing module, whether the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group and sent according to the determination result, and determining, by the PPT communication establishment response, whether to join the PPT communication.
  • the PTT communication setup response when the PTT communication setup response is sent when the server determines that the terminal is located outside a predefined area of the group
  • the PTT communication establishment response includes a message that the PTT communication establishment fails.
  • the PTT communication setup response when the PTT communication setup response is sent when the server determines that the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group
  • the PTT communication establishment response includes a PTT communication established message and a PTT communication permission establishment message, and carries the group identifier of the group, and the predefined area information of the group.
  • the method further includes: a storage module, configured to save the predefined area information of the group.
  • the method further includes: an area monitoring module, configured to: when the terminal moves, according to the saved predefined area information And the cell identifier that is sent by the terminal to the cell to determine whether the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group; the sending module is further configured to: if the area monitoring module determines that the terminal leaves the group Defining an area, sending a message leaving the predefined area to the server, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier and the group identifier of the terminal, so that the server moves the terminal out of the Group PTT communication.
  • an area monitoring module configured to: when the terminal moves, according to the saved predefined area information And the cell identifier that is sent by the terminal to the cell to determine whether the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group
  • the sending module is further configured to: if the area monitoring module determines that the terminal leaves the group Defining an area, sending a message leaving the predefined area to the server, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier and the group identifier
  • the area monitoring module is further configured to: when the terminal moves again, according to the saved predefined area The information and the cell identifier of the terminal moving to the cell determine whether the terminal enters a predefined area of the group; the sending module is further configured to: if the area monitoring module determines that the terminal enters the group a predefined area, the message sent to the predefined area is sent to the server, where the message entering the predefined area carries the terminal identifier and the group identifier, so that the server joins the terminal to the group. PTT communication.
  • the receiving module is further configured to: receive a call end message sent by the server, the call end message The group identifier of the group is carried in the group; and the deleting module is configured to delete the predefined area information of the group that is locally saved.
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides a server, including: a processing module, configured to determine a PTT communication that is allowed to establish a group; and a sending module, configured to send the group to the terminal of the group Paging message of the PTT communication, the paging message carrying the group of the group Identify and pre-defined area information for the group.
  • the method further includes: a receiving module, configured to receive a paging response message sent by the terminal of the group, where the paging response message carries The group identity of the group, the paging response message is sent by the terminal after determining that the terminal is currently within the predefined area according to the cell identity of the current cell.
  • the receiving module when any terminal of the group leaves a predefined area of the group, the receiving module is further configured to receive the a message sent by the leaving terminal to leave the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the leaving terminal and the group identifier of the group; the server further includes: a removal module, The PTT communication of the group is moved out of the leaving terminal.
  • the receiving module is further configured to: receive a message that is sent by the ingress terminal and enter a predefined area, where the message that enters the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the incoming terminal and the group The group identifier of the group; the server further includes: an adding module, adding the entered terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
  • the receiving module is further configured to: after receiving the paging response message sent by the terminal that wants to end the PPT communication, receive a call end request sent by the terminal of the group; the sending module further And sending, to all terminals of the group, a call end message, so that all terminals of the group delete the predefined area information of the group.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a terminal, including: a receiving module, configured to receive a paging message of a PTT communication of a group sent by a server, where the paging message carries the group a group identifier and predefined area information of the group; a storage module, configured to save the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier.
  • the method further includes: an area monitoring module, configured to determine, according to a cell identifier of the current cell of the terminal, and the predefined area information, Whether it is located in a predefined area of the group; a sending module, configured to send a page to the server if the terminal is currently located in a predefined area of the group In response to the message, the paging response message carries the group identity of the group.
  • the area monitoring module is further configured to: if the terminal is currently located in a predefined area of the group In addition, after the terminal moves, determining whether the terminal enters a predefined area of the group according to the saved predefined area information and the cell identifier of the terminal moving to the cell; the sending module is further configured to: When the area monitoring module determines that the terminal enters a predefined area of the group, sending a message to the server to enter a predefined area, where the message entering the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and The group identity of the group, such that the server joins the terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
  • the area monitoring module is further configured to: After the server sends a message to enter a predefined area, or after sending a paging response message to the server, when the terminal moves, determining according to the saved predefined area information and the cell identity of the terminal moving to the cell Whether the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group; the sending module is further configured to: when the area monitoring module determines that the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group, send a departure pre- The message of the area is defined, and the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identity of the group, so that the server moves the terminal out of the PTT communication of the group.
  • the receiving module is further configured to: After receiving the paging message of the PTT communication of the group sent by the server, receiving the call end message sent by the server, where the call end message carries the group identifier of the group; further comprising: a deleting module, configured to: Delete the predefined area information of the group saved locally.
  • the ninth aspect provides a communication system, including the server, any one of the sixth aspect or the sixth aspect, in any one possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect or the fifth aspect And a terminal in any one of the possible implementations of the eighth aspect or the eighth aspect.
  • the ninth aspect provides a communication system, including the server in any one of the possible implementation manners of the seventh aspect or the seventh aspect, and at least one possible implementation of the eighth aspect or the eighth aspect
  • the terminal in the way.
  • the PTT communication method, the server, the terminal, and the system provided by the embodiment of the present invention enable the terminal to transmit the predefined area information of the group to all the registered terminals of the group when the communication is established, so that the terminal can determine whether the current terminal is currently It is located within a predefined area of the group, so as to realize the function of communication only within the predefined area; communication between the server and the terminal through the wireless IP network does not need to change any network element in the mobile network.
  • Embodiment 1 is a flowchart of Embodiment 1 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention
  • Embodiment 2 is a flowchart of Embodiment 2 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention
  • Embodiment 3 is a flowchart of Embodiment 3 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention
  • Embodiment 4 is a flowchart of Embodiment 4 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of Embodiment 5 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 6 is a flowchart of Embodiment 6 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 7 is a flowchart of Embodiment 7 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 8 is a flowchart of Embodiment 8 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 9 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 9 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 1 of a server according to the present invention is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a server according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 11 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a server according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 1 of a terminal according to the present invention is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a terminal according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a terminal according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 3 of a server according to the present invention is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 3 of a server according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 4 of a server according to the present invention is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 4 of a server according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 3 of a terminal according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 4 of a terminal according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 18 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a communication system according to the present invention
  • 19 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a communication system according to the present invention
  • Embodiment 5 of a server according to the present invention is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 5 of a server according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 5 of a terminal according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 6 of a server according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 6 of a terminal according to the present invention.
  • the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention are clearly and completely described in the following with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present invention.
  • the embodiments are a part of the embodiments of the invention, and not all of the embodiments. All other embodiments obtained by a person of ordinary skill in the art based on the embodiments of the present invention without creative efforts are within the scope of the present invention.
  • the predefined area information of at least one group is added to the group attribute of the PTT server (for example, the cell identification list of the corresponding group), which means that for a certain group, only in its predefined area ( For example, in the cells corresponding to the cell identifier list, the PPT communication of the group can be performed.
  • This field can be maintained by the user or by the computer.
  • the embodiment of the present invention does not impose any limitation.
  • the following functions are added to the PPT application of the terminal:
  • the PPT group information that belongs to the terminal and is in communication is saved, and includes: a group identifier, and predefined area information corresponding to the group.
  • the saved information can be automatically maintained by the system according to the signaling interaction.
  • the function of acquiring the cell identifier of the current cell of the terminal in real time is added, for example, the command interface of the wireless modem (modem) in the terminal is called, so that the current cell of the terminal is obtained in real time.
  • Cell identity a wireless modem is a necessary module in a mobile terminal, and the module cooperates with a wireless network to complete a wireless transmission function. This module provides a command interface for external calls. In the interface command set, you can set the command to query the cell ID of the cell where the terminal is currently located.
  • the terminal can forward the information of the cell in which it is currently located to the server in real time, and the server can determine whether the terminal is in the predetermined area according to the predefined area information of the pre-stored group, thereby determining whether The terminal joins the PPT communication of the group.
  • the server can modify the configuration of the server and the terminal, and the PPT communication in the predefined area can be realized without adapting and modifying the wireless network, thereby reducing the requirement of the PPT communication to the wireless network and reducing the cost.
  • a wireless IP network interconnection protocol
  • the network communicates.
  • the wireless IP network can be any wireless network supporting the IP transmission protocol, such as the wireless packet network of the mobile communication carrier;
  • the server can be a computer capable of carrying the PTT communication application and connecting to the wireless IP network;
  • It may be a terminal device capable of carrying a PTT communication application and capable of accessing a wireless IP network, such as a handheld terminal or an in-vehicle terminal, and each terminal belongs to at least one group corresponding to the group information saved in the server, that is, the terminal. Is a member of a group.
  • FIG. 1 is a flowchart of Embodiment 1 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention.
  • the execution body of this embodiment is a server. As shown in FIG. 1, the method in this embodiment may include:
  • Step 101 The server receives a PTT communication establishment request sent by the terminal, where the PTT communication establishment request carries a group identifier and a cell identifier of a cell where the terminal is currently located.
  • the terminal needs to open the PTT communication application before it can interact with the server.
  • the terminal logs in.
  • the specific process is as follows: The terminal sends a registration message to the server, where the registration message carries the terminal identifier and the IP address of the terminal.
  • the server will locally store the mapping relationship between the terminal identifier and the IP address of the terminal.
  • the terminal will always use the IP address to communicate with the server until the terminal exits the PTT communication application.
  • the server regards the terminal as an offline state, and deletes the mapping relationship between the terminal identifier of the terminal and the IP address of the terminal.
  • step 101 After the terminal opens the PTT communication application, selects a group in which the terminal is located, and sends a PTT communication establishment request, and the server receives a cell identifier including the group identifier and the cell currently located by the terminal.
  • the PTT communication establishes a request, and the server can determine the terminal identifier of the terminal by using the IP address sent by the request.
  • the PTT communication establishment request is a request message of the user plane, and the terminal may send the request message to the server through the wireless IP network in the form of an IP data packet, without involving the control plane signaling in the communication network, and the terminal and the server are both Control plane signaling communication with the communication network itself is not performed.
  • Step 102 Query, according to the group identifier, the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier.
  • the server stores predefined area information of each group.
  • the predefined area information may be a cell identifier of all cells in the predefined area.
  • Step 103 Determine, according to the queried predefined area information and the cell identifier of the cell where the terminal is currently located, whether the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group. Specifically, by traversing all the cell identifiers of the predefined area, it is determined whether the cell identity of the cell where the terminal is currently located matches one of the cell identifiers of the predefined area.
  • Step 104 Send a PTT communication setup response to the terminal according to the judgment result.
  • the terminal if the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group, sending a PTT communication setup response to the terminal, where the PTT communication setup response carries the group identifier of the group, the group Predefined area information for the group.
  • the PTT communication setup response carries the group identifier of the group, so that the terminal can determine, according to the group identifier, which group the PTT communication setup response corresponds to, thereby determining whether to join the group.
  • the PTT communication setup response carries the predefined information of the group, so that the terminal of the group can determine for itself whether it is located in a predefined area of the group.
  • the PTT communication setup response includes a PTT communication established message and a PTT communication permission establishment message. Specifically, if the group that the terminal wants to establish the PTT communication is currently performing PTT communication, the server sends a PTT communication established message to the terminal; If the PTT communication of the group that the terminal wants to establish PTT communication is not established, the server sends a PTT communication permission establishment message to the terminal.
  • the PTT communication setup response sent to the terminal includes a message that the PTT communication setup failed.
  • the server when the server receives the PTT communication establishment request sent by the terminal, the server queries and determines whether the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group for which the PTT communication is to be performed, and sends a different PTT to the terminal according to the determination result.
  • the communication establishment response implements a predefined area function of the PTT communication establishment phase; and when the terminal is located within the predefined area of the group, the PTT communication establishment response sent to the terminal carries the group identifier of the group And pre-defined area information, so that the terminal can determine whether it is located within the predefined area, so that the terminal can perform different operations according to the determined situation, thereby implementing the predefined area function in the PTT communication process;
  • the information exchange between the server and the terminal is realized through the wireless IP network, and the information exchanged is the information of the user plane for the wireless IP network, and does not need to interact with the wireless IP network itself, nor does it involve communication.
  • Control plane signaling in the network that is, the method of this embodiment, only To provide a server supporting the method and a terminal supporting the method, the server and the terminal can communicate through any existing wireless IP network, and do not need to change any network element in the existing communication network, thereby realizing Based on the existing mobile network, the PTT communication has the function of pre-defined area, which reduces the implementation cost of the PTT communication of the predefined area.
  • 2 is a flowchart of Embodiment 2 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention.
  • the execution body of this embodiment is a server. As shown in the figure, the method in this embodiment may include:
  • Step 201 The server receives a PTT communication establishment request sent by the terminal, where the PTT communication establishment request carries a group identifier and a cell identifier of a cell where the terminal is currently located.
  • Step 202 Query, according to the group identifier, the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier.
  • Step 203 Determine, according to the queried predefined area information and the cell identifier of the cell where the terminal is currently located, whether the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group.
  • Step 204 Send a PTT communication setup response to the terminal according to the determination result.
  • the PTT communication establishment response sent to the terminal includes a message that the PTT communication establishment fails, and the PTT communication establishment failure message may also be carried.
  • the reason for the failure for example: The terminal is outside the predefined area of the group.
  • the PTT communication setup response includes a PTT communication established message and a PTT communication allowed setup message.
  • the server sends a PTT communication established message to the terminal, and the terminal may directly join the PTT communication of the group; If the PTT communication of the group that the terminal wants to establish the PTT communication is not established, the server sends a PTT communication permission establishment message to the terminal. In this case, the following steps are also required to perform the PTT communication of the group.
  • Step 205 Send a paging message to the other terminals of the group, where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group.
  • the server will send a paging message to all other registered terminals of the group except for transmitting a PTT communication setup request.
  • the server does not judge whether the other terminals are in the predefined area, but carries the predefined area information in the paging message and sends it to the terminal, and the terminal determines whether it is within the predefined area.
  • Step 206 Receive a paging response message sent by another terminal of the group, where the paging response is The message identifier of the group is carried in the message, and the paging response message is sent by the other terminal after determining that the terminal is currently in the predefined area according to the cell identity of the cell in which the current cell is located.
  • the terminal determines that it is currently outside the predefined area of the group, it does not send a page response message to the server.
  • Step 207 Receive a message that is sent by the terminal of the group to leave a predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group.
  • Step 208 Move the terminal out of the PTT communication of the group.
  • the server further determines whether the terminal is a host terminal: if the terminal is a non-talking terminal, stopping sending the media stream of the calling terminal to the terminal; if the terminal is the main terminal, translating and releasing the right to speak , and update the status of "No Speaker” of the group to "No", so that other terminals in the group that are conducting PTT communication can apply for the right to speak.
  • Steps 207 and 208 are a set of optional steps, where the specific scenario is: the current cell of the terminal in the group that is undergoing PTT communication changes, when the terminal determines that the terminal has moved to a predefined area of the group. The message leaving the predefined area will be sent to the server, at which point the server performs steps 207, 208.
  • Step 209 Receive a message that the terminal of the group sends a predefined area, where the message that enters the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group.
  • Steps 209 and 210 are a set of optional steps.
  • the specific scenario is as follows: The current cell of the terminal of the group changes. For example, after the server performs steps 207 and 208, the terminal continues to move and moves back to the predefined area. Within the time, the terminal will send a message to the server to enter the predefined area, at which time the server performs steps 209, 210.
  • Step 210 Add the terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
  • the server sends the media stream of the host terminal to the terminal.
  • Step 211 The terminal that receives the group sends a call end request.
  • Step 212 Send a call end message to all terminals of the group, so that all terminals of the group delete the predefined area information of the group.
  • any terminal that is performing PTT communication may send a call end request to the server, and after receiving the call end request, the server sends a call end message to all registered terminals of the group, so that the terminal deletes the call.
  • Predefined area information for the group is sent to the terminal of the group by the server, and the current cell of the terminal changes after receiving the PTT communication established message, the PTT communication permission establishment message or the paging message by the terminal.
  • the method of this embodiment can not change existing wireless
  • the IP network realizes the predefined area function of PTT communication, which reduces the implementation cost.
  • FIG. 3 is a flowchart of Embodiment 3 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention.
  • the execution body of this embodiment is a terminal that sends a PTT communication setup request.
  • the method in this embodiment may include: Step 301: A terminal sends a PTT communication setup request to a server, where the PTT communication setup request carries a group identifier and a cell identifier of a cell where the terminal is currently located.
  • the server may query the predefined area of the group by using the group identifier, so that it may be determined whether the terminal is currently located in a predefined area of the group.
  • Step 302 Receive a PTT communication establishment response sent by the server, where the PTT communication establishment response is a predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier and a cell identifier of a current cell of the terminal, Determining whether the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group and transmitting according to the judgment result.
  • Step 303 Determine, according to the PPT communication establishment response, whether to join the PPT communication of the group.
  • the PTT communication setup response received by the terminal includes a PTT communication established message or a PTT communication permission establishment message, determining to join the PTT communication of the group; when the PTT communication establishment response received by the terminal includes a PTT If the communication establishment fails, it is determined that the PTT communication of the group cannot be joined.
  • the PTT communication setup request sent by the terminal to the server carries the group identifier and the current cell identifier of the terminal, so that the server can query the predefined area information of the group according to the group identifier, thereby determining whether the terminal is located.
  • implementing a predefined area function in the PTT communication establishment phase all interactions between the server and the terminal are through existing Wireless All the interaction information performed by the IP network is user plane information for the communication network, and does not involve communication network control plane signaling. Therefore, the method of this embodiment can implement PTT communication without changing the existing wireless IP network.
  • the predefined zone features reduce implementation costs.
  • Step 401 A terminal sends a PTT communication setup request to a server, where the PTT communication setup request carries a group identifier and a cell identifier of a cell where the terminal is currently located.
  • the received PTT communication establishment response sent by the server includes a message that the PTT communication establishment fails, and the message is that the server determines that the terminal is located in the Sent when the group ID corresponds to the group corresponding to the predefined area.
  • Step 402 Receive a PTT communication setup response sent by the server, where the PTT communication setup response carries the predefined identifier information of the group identifier and the group corresponding to the group identifier, where the PTT communication establishment response is The server sends, according to the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier and the cell identifier of the cell where the terminal is currently located, after determining that the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group.
  • the PTT communication setup response includes a PTT communication established message and PTT communication allows the establishment of a message. If the group that the terminal wants to establish PTT communication is currently performing PTT communication, the PTT communication establishment response sent by the server is a PTT communication established message, and the terminal can directly join the PTT communication of the group; if the terminal wants The PTT communication establishment of the group to establish the PTT communication is not established, and the PTT communication establishment response sent by the server is a PTT communication permission establishment message.
  • Step 403 Determine, according to the PPT communication establishment response, a PPT communication that joins the group.
  • Step 404 Save predefined area information of the group.
  • Step 405 When the terminal moves, determine, according to the saved predefined area information and the cell identity that the terminal moves to the cell, whether the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group.
  • Step 406 When the determination result is yes, send a message to the server to leave the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier and the group identifier of the terminal, so that the server will The terminal moves out of the PTT communication of the group.
  • the terminal leaves the predefined area of the group, specifically, the cell where the terminal is located changes, the original cell is located in a predefined area of the group, and the current cell is located in the group. Outside of the predefined area.
  • Step 407 When the terminal moves again, determine, according to the saved predefined area information and the cell identifier that the terminal moves to the cell, whether the terminal enters a predefined area of the group.
  • Step 408 When the determination result is yes, send a message to the server to enter a predefined area, where the message entering the predefined area carries a terminal identifier and a group identifier, so that the server joins the terminal The group's PTT communication.
  • steps 407 and 408 The scenario of steps 407 and 408 is: the terminal moves outside the predefined area of the group and then moves back to the predefined area of the group. At this time, the message to enter the predefined area is sent to the server.
  • Step 409 Receive a call end message sent by the server, where the call end message carries a group identifier of the group.
  • the call end message is sent by the server after receiving a call end request sent by any terminal of the group that is performing PTT communication.
  • Step 410 Delete pre-defined area information of the group saved locally.
  • step 410 The purpose of step 410 is to stop the terminal from entering the predefined area or leaving the predefined area when the terminal enters or leaves the predefined area of the group after the PTT communication of the group ends.
  • the terminal establishes the predefined area information of the group carried in the response by using the PTT communication sent by the receiving server, and uses the predefined area information to determine whether it is currently located in the predefined area of the group when moving. Therefore, according to the determined situation, the server sends a message leaving the predefined area or entering the predefined area, so that the server moves the terminal out or joins the PTT communication of the group, thereby implementing a predefined area function of the PTT communication;
  • the interaction is performed through the existing wireless IP network. All the interaction information is the user plane information for the communication network, and does not involve the communication network control plane signaling. Therefore, the method of this embodiment may not change the existing The wireless IP network realizes the predefined area function of PTT communication, which reduces the implementation cost.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of Embodiment 5 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention.
  • the execution body of this embodiment is a server. As shown in FIG. 5, the method in this embodiment may include:
  • Step 501 The server determines to allow PTT communication of the group to be established.
  • the specific scenario is, for example, the server receives the establishment of the PTT communication sent by one terminal of the group. The request, and after determining that the terminal is within a predefined area of the group, then the server determines to allow establishment of the group's PTT communication.
  • Step 502 Send a paging message of the PTT communication of the group to the terminal of the group, where the paging message carries a group identifier of the group and predefined area information of the group.
  • the target object that the server sends the paging message may be sent in the group except
  • the PTT communicates with other terminals than the requesting terminal.
  • the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group, so that the terminal receiving the paging message can determine whether it is located according to the predefined area information of the group. Within the predefined area of the group.
  • the server carries the group identifier and the predefined area information of the group in the paging message sent by the server, so that the terminal can determine whether it is located in the predefined area, so that the terminal can judge according to the judgment.
  • the case performs different operations, such as returning a page response or not returning a page response, and transmitting a message entering or leaving a predefined area of the group during subsequent PTT communication, thereby implementing a predefined area of PTT communication.
  • the information interaction between the server and the terminal can be realized through the existing wireless IP network, and the information exchanged is the user plane information for the wireless IP network, and the wireless IP
  • the network itself does not need to interact, nor does it involve control plane signaling in the communication network; that is, the method of this embodiment only needs to provide a server supporting the method and a terminal supporting the method, and the server and the terminal can pass the present Any wireless IP network can communicate without changing the existing one. Any communication network NE, thereby realizing the PTT communication based on the existing mobile network having a predefined area functions to reduce the implementation cost of a predefined PTT communication area.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of Embodiment 6 of the PTT communication method according to the present invention.
  • the execution body of this embodiment is a server. As shown in FIG. 6, the method in this embodiment may include:
  • Step 601 The server determines to allow PTT communication of the group to be established.
  • Step 602 Send, to the terminal of the group, a paging message of the PTT communication of the group, where the paging message carries a group identifier of the group and predefined area information of the group.
  • Step 603 Receive a paging response message sent by the terminal of the group, where the paging response message carries a group identifier of the group, where the paging response message is that the terminal is according to its current current cell.
  • the cell identifier is sent after being judged to be currently within the predefined area.
  • the terminal receiving the paging message determines that it is currently in a predefined area of the group
  • the paging response message is not sent to the server; when the terminal moves into the predefined area of the group, the server will send a message to the predefined area, which does not need to be Send a page response message.
  • Step 604 Receive a message that is sent by the terminal of the group to leave a predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group.
  • Step 605 Move the terminal out of the PTT communication of the group.
  • Steps 604 and 605 are a set of optional steps.
  • the specific scenario is: the current cell of the terminal in the group that is undergoing PTT communication changes, when the terminal determines that the current location is outside the predefined area of the group. The message leaving the predefined area will be sent to the server, at which point the server performs steps 604, 605.
  • the server further determines whether the terminal is the main terminal: if the terminal is a non-talking terminal, stopping sending the media stream of the calling terminal to the terminal; if the terminal is the main terminal, translating the right to speak, and The status of "whether or not there is a speaker" of the group is updated to "No", so that other terminals in the group that are performing PTT communication can apply for the right to speak.
  • Step 606 Receive a message that is sent by the terminal of the group to enter a predefined area, where the message that enters the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group.
  • Step 607 Add the terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
  • Steps 606 and 607 are a set of optional steps, where the specific scenario is: the current cell of a certain terminal of the group changes, for example, the terminal moves to a predefined area of the group, and the server performs steps 604 and 605. After the terminal continues to move and moves back to the predefined area of the group, a message to enter the predefined area will be sent to the server. At this time, the server performs steps 606, 607; or, the server performs step 603. When a terminal in the group is outside the predefined area of the group, and the terminal moves to a predefined area of the group at the current moment, the terminal sends a message to the server to enter the predefined area, which The server then performs steps 606, 607.
  • step 607 specifically, the server sends the media stream of the host terminal to the terminal.
  • Step 608 Receive a call end request sent by the terminal of the group.
  • Step 609 Send a call end message to all terminals of the group, so that all terminals of the group delete the predefined area information of the group.
  • any terminal that is performing PTT communication may send a call end request to the server, and the server sends a call to all registered terminals of the group after receiving the call end request. Ending the message, so that the terminal deletes the predefined area information of the group.
  • the pre-defined area information of the group is sent to the terminal of the group by the server, so that after the terminal receives the paging message and the current cell of the terminal changes, it can determine whether it is located in the predefined area of the group. And performing different operations according to the determined situation, such as sending a paging response to the server or not sending a paging response, sending a message to the server to enter a predefined area or leaving the predefined area, thereby implementing a predefined area of PTT communication.
  • the above-mentioned interaction between the server and the terminal is performed through the existing wireless IP network, and all the interaction information is user plane information for the communication network, and does not involve communication network control plane signaling. Therefore, this embodiment The method can realize the predefined area function of PTT communication without changing the existing wireless IP network, and the implementation cost is reduced.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of Embodiment 7 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention.
  • the execution subject of this embodiment is a terminal that receives a paging message.
  • the method in this embodiment may include:
  • Step 701 The terminal receives a paging message of the PTT communication of the group sent by the server, where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group.
  • a terminal in the group sends a PTT communication establishment request to the server, and the server sends a PTT communication permission establishment message to the terminal that sends the request, at this time, all the registered other terminals of the group will Receiving a paging message of the group PTT communication sent by the server.
  • the server cannot communicate with it over the wireless IP network, so the server does not send a paging message to the unregistered terminal. And if the terminal is registered after the group's PTT communication is established, the server will resend the paging message to it.
  • Step 702 Save the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier.
  • the terminal After receiving the paging message of the PTT communication, the terminal saves the group identifier carried in the paging message and the predefined area information of the group locally, so that the terminal can be based on the group during the PTT communication process.
  • the predefined area information of the group performs different operations, such as returning or not returning a page response message to the server, sending a message leaving the predefined area to the server, or entering a message of a predefined area.
  • the PTT communication paging message of the group sent by the terminal receiving server carries the group identifier and the predefined area information, so that the terminal can determine whether it is currently located in the predefined area of the group, according to the judgment.
  • the result determines whether to send a paging response message to the server, thereby implementing a predefined area function of the PTT communication; all interactions between the server and the terminal are through existing
  • the wireless IP network performs all the information about the user plane for the communication network, and does not involve the communication network control plane signaling. Therefore, the method of this embodiment does not change the existing wireless.
  • the IP network realizes the predefined area function of PTT communication, which reduces the implementation cost.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart of Embodiment 8 of the PTT communication method according to the present invention.
  • the executor of this embodiment is a terminal that receives a paging message. As shown in FIG. 8, the method in this embodiment may include:
  • Step 801 The terminal receives a paging message of the PTT communication of the group sent by the server, where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group.
  • Step 802 Correspond to the group identifier, and save predefined area information of the group.
  • Step 803 Determine, according to the cell identifier of the cell in which the current cell is located, and the predefined area information, whether the current location is within the predefined area of the group.
  • the terminal compares the cell identifier of the current cell with the cell identifier of the predefined area belonging to the group to determine whether it is currently located in a predefined area of the group.
  • Step 804 If the terminal is currently located in a predefined area of the group, send a paging response message to the server, where the paging response message carries the group identifier of the group.
  • the PTT communication of the group can be successfully established.
  • a terminal in the group applies for the right to become the terminal, other terminals can receive.
  • Step 805 If the terminal is currently located outside the predefined area of the group, and after the terminal moves, determine whether the terminal enters according to the saved predefined area information and the cell identity of the terminal moving to the cell. A predefined area of the group.
  • Step 806 When the terminal enters a predefined area of the group, send a message to the server to enter a predefined area, where the message entering the predefined area carries the terminal identifier and the location of the terminal
  • the group identity of the group is such that the server joins the terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
  • Step 807 When the terminal moves, determining, according to the saved predefined area information and the cell identifier of the terminal moving to the cell, whether the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group.
  • Step 808 When the terminal leaves the predefined area of the group, send a message to the server to leave the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group A group identity of the group such that the server moves the terminal out of the PTT communication of the group.
  • the specific scenarios of the steps 807 and 808 are as follows: The terminal moves to the outside of the predefined area of the group during the PTT communication of the group. At this time, the terminal sends a message to the server to leave the predefined area.
  • Step 809 Receive a call end message sent by the server, where the call end message carries a group identifier of the group.
  • the call end message is sent by the server after receiving a call end request sent by any terminal of the group that is performing PTT communication.
  • Step 810 Delete pre-defined area information of the group that is saved locally.
  • step 810 is to stop the terminal from entering the predefined area or leaving the predefined area when the terminal enters or leaves the predefined area of the group after the PTT communication of the group ends.
  • the terminal receives the predefined area information of the group carried in the group PTT communication paging message sent by the server, and can determine whether the current cell is located in the predefined area when the current cell changes during the PTT communication process. Therefore, different operations can be performed according to the determined situation. Specifically, the terminal can use the predefined area information to determine whether it is currently located in a predefined area of the group when it moves, thereby sending a message to the server according to the determined situation.
  • FIG. 9 is a signaling flowchart of a ninth embodiment of a PTT communication method according to the present invention.
  • the embodiment of the present invention names a terminal that sends a PTT establishment request as an initiating terminal, and names another terminal that receives the paging message as a paging terminal. .
  • the number of the paging terminals may be multiple.
  • the embodiment of the present invention is described by taking one example as an example. As shown in FIG. 9, the method in this embodiment may include:
  • Step 901 The initiating terminal sends a PTT communication establishment request to the server, where the PTT communication establishment request carries the group identifier and the cell identifier of the cell where the terminal is currently located.
  • Step 902 The server queries, according to the group identifier, predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier.
  • Step 903 The server determines whether the initiating terminal is located in a predefined area of the group. Inside.
  • Step 904 If the originating terminal is located outside a predefined area of the group, the server sends a PTT communication setup response including a PTT communication setup failure message to the initiating terminal.
  • Step 905 If the originating terminal is located in a predefined area of the group, the server sends a PTT communication setup response including the PTT communication permission establishment to the initiating terminal, where the PTT communication setup response carries the group Group ID of the group, predefined area information of the group.
  • the server determines that the initiating terminal is located in a predefined area of the group, and when the PPT communication of the group is not established, sends a PTT communication setup response including the PTT communication permission establishment to the initiating terminal.
  • Step 906 The server sends a paging message to the other terminals of the group, where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group.
  • Step 907 The paging terminal determines, according to the cell identity of the current cell, whether it is currently located in a predefined area of the group.
  • Step 908 If the paging terminal is located in a predefined area of the group, send a paging response message to the server, where the paging response message carries the group identifier of the group.
  • Step 909 If the paging terminal is located outside a predefined area of the group, when the paging terminal moves into a predefined area of the group, send the predefined area to the server.
  • the message that enters the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the paging terminal and the group identifier of the group.
  • Step 910 The server adds the paging terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
  • Step 911 If the paging terminal moves again, when moving to a predefined area of the group, sending a message leaving the predefined area to the server, where the message leaving the predefined area carries The terminal identifier of the paging terminal and the group identifier of the group.
  • Step 912 The server moves the paging terminal out of the PTT communication of the group.
  • Step 913 If the initiating terminal moves outside the predefined area of the group, send a message to the server to leave the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the initiating terminal and The group identifier of the group.
  • Step 914 The server moves the initiating terminal out of the PTT communication of the group.
  • Step 915 If the initiating terminal moves again, when moving to a predefined area of the group The message is sent to the server to enter the predefined area, and the message that enters the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the originating terminal and the group identifier of the group.
  • Step 916 The server joins the initiating terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
  • Step 917 Any terminal that is performing PTT communication sends a call end request to the server.
  • Step 918 Send a call end message to all registered terminals.
  • Step 919 All registered terminals delete the locally reserved predefined area information of the group.
  • the server can send the pre-defined area information of the group to all the registered terminals of the group when the PTT communication is established, so that the terminal can determine whether it is currently located in a predefined area of the group. Therefore, the function of PTT communication can be performed only within a predefined area; all interactions between the server and the terminal are performed through an existing wireless IP network, and all interaction information is user plane information for the communication network. The communication network control plane signaling is not involved. Therefore, the method in this embodiment can implement the predefined area function of the PTT communication without changing the existing wireless IP network, thereby reducing the implementation cost.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of the server of the present invention.
  • the server 1000 of this embodiment may include: a receiving module 11, a querying module 12, a determining module 13, and a sending module 14.
  • the receiving module 11 is configured to receive a PTT communication setup request sent by the terminal, where the PTT communication setup request carries a group identifier and a cell identifier of a cell where the terminal is currently located, and the query module 12 is configured to use, according to the group And determining, by the determining module, the determining unit 13 , configured to determine, according to the pre-defined area information that is queried and the cell identifier of the cell where the terminal is currently located, whether the terminal is located The pre-defined area of the group; the sending module 14 is configured to send a PTT communication setup response to the terminal according to the determination result.
  • the server of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 1 , and has a corresponding function module, and the implementation principle thereof is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 1 , and details are not described herein again.
  • the device of the embodiment when the server receives the PTT communication establishment request sent by the terminal, queries and determines whether the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group for which the PTT communication is to be performed, and sends the terminal to the terminal according to different judgment results.
  • Sending different PTT communication setup responses all predetermined interaction information for implementing PTT communication is user plane information for the communication network, and does not involve communication network control. Face signaling, therefore, the method of the embodiment can implement the predefined area function of PTT communication without changing the existing wireless IP network, and the implementation cost is reduced.
  • the sending module 14 is specifically configured to: if the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group, send a PTT communication setup response to the terminal, where the PTT communication setup response is carried. a group identifier of the group, and predefined area information of the group.
  • the PTT communication setup response carries the group identity of the group and the predefined information of the group, so that the terminal of the group can determine for itself whether it is located in a predefined area of the group.
  • the PTT communication setup response includes a PTT communication established message and a PTT communication permission establishment message. Specifically, if the group that the terminal wants to establish the PTT communication is currently performing PTT communication, the server sends a PTT communication established message to the terminal; If the PTT communication of the group that the terminal wants to establish PTT communication is not established, the server sends a PTT communication permission establishment message to the terminal.
  • the sending module 14 is specifically configured to: the PTT communication setup response sent to the terminal includes a message that the PTT communication establishment fails.
  • the sending module 14 is further configured to: if the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier is not established, to other terminals of the group Sending a paging message, where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group; the receiving module 11 is further configured to: receive the paging sent by other terminals of the group In response to the message, the paging response message carries the group identity of the group, and the paging response message is that the other terminal is determined to be within the predefined area according to the cell identity of the cell in which the current cell is located. Sent.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a second embodiment of a server according to the present invention.
  • the server 1100 of the present embodiment is based on the server structure shown in FIG. 10.
  • the receiving module 11 is further configured to receive the group. a message sent by the terminal of the group to leave the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group; correspondingly, the server in this embodiment further includes: Module 15, a PTT communication for moving the terminal out of the group.
  • the receiving module 11 is further configured to: receive a message that is sent by the terminal of the group to enter a predefined area, where the message that enters the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group of the group
  • the server in this embodiment further includes: an adding module 16, configured to join the terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
  • the server embodiment shown in FIG. 11 further, in a specific implementation, the receiving module 11 further The terminal that receives the group sends a call end request; the sending module 14 is further configured to send a call end message to all terminals of the group, so that all terminals of the group delete the pre-group Define area information.
  • the server of this embodiment can be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and has corresponding functional modules.
  • the implementation principle and technical effects are similar to the method embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a terminal according to the present invention.
  • the terminal corresponding to this embodiment is a terminal that sends a PTT communication setup request.
  • the terminal 1200 of this embodiment may include: a sending module 21, a receiving module 22, and a processing module 23, where the sending module 21 is configured to send a PTT communication establishment request to the server, where the PTT communication establishment request is Carrying the group identifier and the cell identifier of the cell where the terminal is currently located; the receiving module 22 is configured to receive a PTT communication setup response sent by the server, where the PTT communication setup response is that the server corresponds to the group identifier Pre-defined area information of the group and the cell identifier of the cell in which the terminal is currently located, determining whether the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group and transmitting according to the determination result; and processing module 23, configured to perform, according to the PPT The communication establishes a response to determine whether to join the PPT communication.
  • the terminal in this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 3, and has a corresponding function module, and the implementation principle thereof is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, and details are not described herein again.
  • the PTT communication setup request sent by the terminal to the server carries the group identifier and the current cell identifier of the terminal, so that the server can query the predefined area information of the group according to the group identifier, thereby determining the terminal.
  • the method of this embodiment may not change the existing wireless IP network.
  • the implementation of the predefined area function of PTT communication reduces the implementation cost.
  • the terminal embodiment shown in FIG. 12 in a specific implementation, the PTT communication setup response received by the receiving module 22, when the PTT communication setup response is determined by the server, the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group.
  • the PTT communication setup response includes a message that the PTT communication establishment failed.
  • the terminal embodiment shown in FIG. 12, further, in a specific implementation, is also used when The PTT communication setup response is sent when the server determines that the terminal is located within a predefined area of the group, and the UI communication setup response received by the receiving module 22 includes: a communication established message and a communication permission Establishing a message, and the ⁇ communication establishment response carries a group identifier of the group, and predefined area information of the group.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a terminal according to the present invention.
  • the terminal corresponding to this embodiment is sent.
  • the terminal 1300 of this embodiment may further include: a storage module 24, configured to save predefined area information of the group, and a regional monitoring module 25, When the terminal moves, determining whether the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group according to the saved predefined area information and a cell identifier of the terminal moving to the cell, and for, when the terminal moves again And determining, according to the saved predefined area information and the cell identifier of the terminal moving to the cell, whether the terminal enters a predefined area of the group; correspondingly, the sending module 21 is further configured to: if the area monitoring module 25 Determining that the terminal leaves the predefined area of the group, and sending a message to the server to leave the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group a group identity, such that the server moves the terminal out of the group of communication; and if the area monitoring module 25 determines The terminal enters a predefined area of the group, and
  • the receiving module 22 is further configured to: receive a call end message sent by the server, where the call end message carries the group identifier of the group; the terminal in this embodiment further includes deleting The module 26 is configured to delete the predefined area information of the group that is saved locally.
  • the terminal in this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 4, and has a corresponding function module.
  • the implementation principle and technical effects are similar to the method embodiment shown in FIG. 4, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 3 of a server according to the present invention.
  • the device corresponding to this embodiment is a server device that sends a paging message to a paging terminal.
  • the server 1400 of this embodiment may include: a processing module 31 and a sending module 32, where the processing module 31 is configured to determine a UI communication that allows a group to be established; and a sending module 32 is configured to send the group
  • the terminal of the group sends a paging message of the communication of the group, where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the group Predefined area information.
  • the device of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 5, and has a corresponding function module, and the implementation principle thereof is similar to the method embodiment shown in FIG. 5, and details are not described herein again.
  • the server of the embodiment carries the group identifier and the predefined area information of the group in the paging message sent by the server, so that the terminal can determine whether it is located in the predefined area, so that the terminal can enable the terminal to Performing different operations according to the determined situation, such as returning a page response or not returning a page response, and transmitting a message entering or leaving a predefined area of the group in a subsequent PTT communication process, thereby implementing a pre-PTT communication Defining the regional function; Because the above implementation of the predefined regional function, the information interaction between the server and the terminal can be implemented through the existing wireless IP network, and the information exchanged is the user's information for the wireless IP network, and The wireless IP network itself does not need to interact, nor does it involve control plane signaling in the
  • PTT communication has the function of a predefined area, which reduces the implementation cost of PTT communication in a predefined area.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 4 of a server according to the present invention.
  • the device corresponding to this embodiment is a server device that sends a paging message to a paging terminal.
  • the server 1500 of the embodiment further includes: a receiving module 33, configured to receive a paging response message sent by the terminal of the group, where the paging is performed.
  • the response message carries the group identifier of the group, and the paging response message is sent by the terminal after determining that the terminal is currently within the predefined area according to the cell identity of the current cell.
  • the receiving module 33 is further configured to, after the paging response message sent by the terminal that receives the group, receive a message that is sent by the terminal of the group to leave a predefined area, where the leaving the predefined area
  • the message carries the terminal identifier and the group identifier of the group; correspondingly, the message may further include: a removal module 34, configured to move the terminal out of the PTT communication of the group.
  • the receiving module 33 is further configured to: after sending the paging message of the PTT communication of the group to the terminal of the group, or leaving the predefined area sent by the terminal receiving the group After receiving the message, the terminal that receives the predefined area is sent by the terminal of the group, and the message that enters the predefined area carries the terminal identifier and the group identifier.
  • the method further includes: adding module 35, The terminal joins the PTT communication of the group.
  • the receiving module 33 is further configured to: send the paging sent by the terminal that receives the group After the response message, the call end request sent by the terminal of the group is received; the sending module 32 is further configured to send a call end message to all terminals of the group, so that all terminals of the group delete the group Predefined area information for the group.
  • the server of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 6, and has corresponding functional modules.
  • the implementation principle and technical effects are similar to the method embodiment shown in FIG. 6, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 3 of a terminal according to the present invention.
  • the terminal corresponding to this embodiment is a terminal that receives a paging message.
  • the terminal 1600 of this embodiment may include: a receiving module 41 and a storage module 42, where the receiving module 41 is configured to receive a paging message of a PTT communication of a group sent by a server, where the paging message is And carrying the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group; the storage module 42 is configured to save the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier.
  • the terminal of the embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 7 , and has a corresponding function module, and the implementation principle thereof is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 , and details are not described herein again.
  • the terminal in this embodiment carries the group identifier and the predefined area information in the PTT communication paging message of the group sent by the receiving server, so that the terminal can determine whether it is currently located in the predefined area of the group, according to The judgment result determines whether to send a paging response message to the server, thereby implementing a predefined area function of the PTT communication; all the interaction between the server and the terminal is performed through the existing wireless IP network, and all the interaction information is for the communication network.
  • the user plane information is not related to the communication network control plane signaling. Therefore, the method in this embodiment can implement the predefined area function of the PTT communication without changing the existing wireless IP network, thereby reducing the implementation cost.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 4 of a terminal according to the present invention.
  • the terminal corresponding to this embodiment is a terminal that receives a paging message.
  • the terminal 1700 of the present embodiment may further include: an area monitoring module 43 and a sending module 44, and an area monitoring module 43 for using the current cell of the terminal, based on the terminal structure shown in FIG.
  • the cell identifier and the predefined area information determine whether the terminal is currently located in a predefined area of the group; the sending module 44 is configured to: if the terminal is currently located in a predefined area of the group And sending a paging response message to the server, where the paging response message carries the group identifier of the group.
  • the area monitoring module 43 is further configured to: if the terminal is currently located outside the predefined area of the group, and after the terminal moves, according to the saved predefined area information and the The cell identifier of the terminal moving to the cell determines whether the terminal enters a predefined area of the group; correspondingly, the sending module 44 is further configured to: when the area monitoring module 43 determines that the terminal enters a predefined area of the group Sending a message to the server to enter a predefined area, where the message entering the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group, so that the server joins the terminal PTT communication of the group.
  • the area monitoring module 43 is further configured to: after the sending module 44 sends a message to the server to enter a predefined area, or after sending the paging response message to the server, when the terminal moves, according to saving The pre-defined area information and the cell identity of the terminal moving to the cell determine whether the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group; the sending module 44 is further configured to: when the area monitoring module 43 determines that the terminal leaves the group And sending, by the server, a message that leaves the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group, so that the server The terminal is moved out of the PTT communication of the group.
  • the receiving module 41 is further configured to: receive a call end message sent by the server, where the call end message carries a group identifier of the group; the terminal in this embodiment further includes: a deleting module 45, configured to: Delete the predefined area information of the group saved locally.
  • the terminal of the embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 8, and the corresponding functional module is provided.
  • the implementation principle and the technical effect are similar to the method embodiment shown in FIG. 8, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a communication system according to the present invention.
  • the system 1800 of this embodiment may include: a server, an originating terminal, and at least one paging terminal, where the initiating terminal establishes a PTT communication for sending.
  • the requested terminal, the paging terminal is a terminal that receives the paging message.
  • the server may use the structure of the server embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or FIG. 11 , and correspondingly, the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 may be performed, and the implementation principle and the technical effect are similar.
  • the initiating terminal can use the structure of the terminal embodiment shown in FIG. 12 or FIG.
  • the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 can be executed, and the implementation principle and technology thereof are implemented.
  • the effect is similar, and is not described here again; at least one paging terminal may use the structure of the terminal embodiment shown in FIG. 16 or FIG. 17, and correspondingly, the technology of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 7 or FIG. 8 may be executed.
  • the implementation principle and technical effects of the solution are similar, and will not be described here.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a communication system according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 19, this embodiment is shown in FIG.
  • the system 1900 can include: a server and at least one paging terminal, wherein the paging terminal is a terminal that receives the paging message.
  • the server may use the structure of the server embodiment shown in FIG. 14 or FIG. 15 , and correspondingly, the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6 may be performed, and the implementation principle and the technical effect are similar.
  • the structure of the terminal embodiment shown in FIG. 16 or FIG. 17 can be used, and correspondingly, the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 7 or FIG. 8 can be implemented. The principle and technical effects are similar and will not be described here.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 5 of the server according to the present invention.
  • the server corresponding to this embodiment is a server that interacts with the originating terminal.
  • the server 2000 of this embodiment may include: a receiving circuit 2001, a transmitting circuit 2002, a memory 2003, and a processor 2004.
  • the memory 2003 stores the group identifier and the predefined area information of the at least one group.
  • the receiving circuit 2001 is configured to receive the PTT communication setup request sent by the terminal, where the PTT communication setup request carries the group identifier and the current location of the terminal.
  • the cell identifier of the cell is connected to the receiving circuit 2001, the transmitting circuit 2002, and the memory 2003, respectively, for performing the following operations: querying, according to the group identifier received by the receiving circuit 2001, the corresponding identifier of the group identifier from the memory 2003.
  • Pre-defined area information of the group determining, according to the queried predefined area information and the cell identifier received by the receiving circuit, whether the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group; 2002 sends a PPT communication setup response to the terminal.
  • the receiving circuit 2001 and the transmitting circuit 2002 may be two independent circuits, or may be integrated into a transmitting and receiving circuit.
  • the processor 2004 sends a PTT communication setup response to the terminal by using the sending circuit 2002 according to the determination result, which may include: if the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group, sending a PTT communication to the terminal. Establishing a response, the PTT communication setup response carrying the group identifier of the group, the predefined area information of the group, where the PTT communication establishment response includes a PTT communication established message or a PTT communication permission establishment message And if the terminal is located outside the predefined area of the group, sending a PTT communication setup response to the terminal, where the PTT communication establishment response includes a message that the PTT communication establishment fails.
  • sending a PTT communication setup response to the terminal specifically includes: if the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier is established, The terminal sends a PTT communication established message; if the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier is not established, sending a PTT communication permission establishment message to the terminal. Further, if the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier is not established, the processor
  • the operation performed in 2004 further includes: sending an instruction to the sending circuit 2002, and sending, by the sending circuit 2002, a paging message to the other terminals of the group, where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the group
  • the pre-defined area information of the group correspondingly, the receiving circuit 2001 is specifically configured to: receive a paging response message sent by another terminal of the group, where the paging response message carries the group identifier of the group, where The paging response message is sent by the other terminal after determining that it is currently within the predefined area according to the cell identity of the cell in which it is currently located.
  • the receiving circuit 2001 may be further configured to receive a message that is sent by the terminal of the group to leave a predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group of the group.
  • the processor 2004 is further configured to: move the terminal out of the group of communication.
  • the receiving circuit 2001 may be further configured to: receive a message that is sent by the terminal of the group and enter a predefined area, where the message that enters the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group of the group The group identifier is correspondingly used by the processor 2004 to join the terminal to the group communication.
  • the receiving circuit 2001 may be further configured to: receive, by the terminal, the terminal to send a call end request; accordingly, the processor 2004 is further configured to send an instruction to the sending circuit 2002, to all the groups by using the sending circuit 2002.
  • the terminal sends a call end message to cause all terminals of the group to delete the predefined area information of the group.
  • the server provided in this embodiment may be used to perform the technical solution implemented by the method shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 and the part of the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 9 that is executed by the server and interacts with the initiating terminal, and the implementation principle thereof is The technical effects are similar and will not be described here.
  • Figure 20 is only a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided by the present invention, and the specific structure can be adjusted according to actual conditions.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 5 of a terminal according to the present invention.
  • the terminal corresponding to this embodiment is an originating terminal.
  • the terminal 2100 of this embodiment may include: a receiver 2101, a transmitter 2102, a memory 2103, and a processor 2104.
  • the transmitter 2102 is configured to: send a ⁇ communication establishment request to the server, where the ⁇ communication establishment request carries a group identifier and a cell identifier of a cell where the terminal is currently located; and the receiver 2101 is configured to receive, by the server, ⁇ Communication establishment response, the ⁇ communication establishment response carrying the group identifier and the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier,
  • the PTT communication establishment response is that the server determines, according to the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier, and the cell identifier of the cell where the terminal is currently located, whether the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group.
  • the processor 2104 configured to determine, according to the ⁇ communication establishment response, whether to join the ⁇ communication of the group, for example, by prompting the user, in combination with the instruction information input by the user, determining whether to join the Group communication.
  • the receiver 2101 and the transmitter 2102 may be two independent functional modules, or may be integrated into a transceiver.
  • the ⁇ communication establishment response received by the receiver 2101 includes ⁇ communication establishment The message of failure.
  • the ⁇ communication establishment response received by the receiver 2101 includes Establishing a message or communication allows the message to be established, and the ⁇ communication setup response carries the group identity of the group, the predefined area information of the group.
  • the memory 2103 is specifically configured to save the predefined area information of the group after receiving the ⁇ communication establishment response sent by the server.
  • the processor 2104 is further configured to: when the terminal moves, determine, according to the saved predefined area information and the cell identifier that the terminal moves to the cell, whether the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group; When the result of the determination is yes, the instructing the sender 2102 sends a message to the server to leave the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier and the group identifier of the terminal, so that the server will The terminal moves out of the group's communication.
  • the processor 2104 is further configured to: when the terminal moves again, determine, according to the saved predefined area information, and the cell identifier that the terminal moves to the cell, whether the terminal enters a predefined area of the group. When the result of the determination is yes, the instructing the sender 2102 sends a message to the server to enter the predefined area, where the message entering the predefined area carries the terminal identifier and the group identifier, so that the server will use the terminal Join the group's communication.
  • the receiver 2101 is further configured to: receive a call end message sent by the server, where the call end message carries a group identifier of the group; and the processor 2104 is further configured to: delete the locally saved group Group of predefined area letters, 3 ⁇ 4.
  • FIG. 21 is only a schematic diagram of the structure of the communication device provided by the present invention, and the specific structure may be adjusted according to actual conditions.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 6 of the server according to the present invention.
  • the server corresponding to this embodiment is a server that interacts with the paging terminal.
  • the server 2200 of this embodiment may include: a receiving circuit 2201, a transmitting circuit 2202, a memory 2203, and a processor 2204.
  • the memory 2203 stores the group identifier and the predefined area information of the at least one group; the processor 2204 is configured to determine the PTT communication that allows the group to be established, and instruct the sending circuit 2202 to send the group to the terminal of the group.
  • the paging message of the PTT communication where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group.
  • the receiving circuit 2201 and the transmitting circuit 2202 may be two independent circuits, or may be integrated into a transmitting and receiving circuit.
  • the receiving circuit 2201 is configured to receive a paging response message sent by the terminal of the group, where the paging response message carries a group identifier of the group, and the paging response message is that the terminal is in the terminal It is determined to be sent after being within the predefined area according to the cell identity of the current cell of the current cell.
  • the receiving circuit 2201 is further configured to: receive a message that is sent by the terminal of the group and leave a predefined area, where the message leaves the predefined area.
  • the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group are carried in; correspondingly, the processor 2204 is further configured to: remove the terminal from the PTT communication of the group.
  • the receiving circuit 2201 further uses And receiving a message that is sent by the terminal of the group to enter a predefined area, where the message that enters the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group; correspondingly, the processor 2204 Also used to join the terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
  • the receiving circuit 2201 is further configured to receive a call end request sent by the terminal of the group.
  • the processor 2204 is further configured to instruct the transmitter 2202 to send a call end message to all terminals of the group, to All terminals of the group are deleted from the predefined area information of the group.
  • the server provided in this embodiment may be used to implement the technology implemented by the method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG.
  • the scheme and the part of the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 9 that is performed by the server and interact with the paging terminal are similar in implementation principle and technical effects, and are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 22 is only a schematic diagram of the structure of the communication device provided by the present invention, and the specific structure may be adjusted according to actual conditions.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 6 of a terminal according to the present invention.
  • the terminal corresponding to this embodiment is a paging terminal.
  • the terminal 2300 of this embodiment may include: a receiver 2301, a transmitter 2302, a memory 2303, and a processor 2304.
  • the receiver 2301 is configured to receive a paging message of the PTT communication of the group sent by the server, where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group; 2304. For corresponding to the group identifier, save the predefined area information of the group on the memory 2303.
  • the receiver 2301 and the transmitter 2302 may be two independent functional modules, or may be integrated into a transceiver.
  • the processor 2304 is configured to determine, according to the cell identifier of the current cell and the predefined area information, whether the current location is within the predefined area of the group; if the terminal is currently located in the group Within the predefined area, the instructing transmitter 2302 sends a paging response message to the server, where the paging response message carries the group identity of the group.
  • the processor 2304 is further configured to: move, according to the saved predefined area information, the cell that the terminal moves to the cell Determining whether the terminal enters a predefined area of the group; when the terminal enters a predefined area of the group, instructing the transmitter 2302 to send a message to the server to enter a predefined area,
  • the message entering the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group, so that the server joins the terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
  • the processor 2304 is further configured to: according to the saved pre Defining the area information and the cell identity of the terminal moving to the cell to determine whether the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group; when the terminal leaves the predefined area of the group, instructing the transmitter 2302 to The server sends a message leaving the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group, so that the server moves the terminal out of the group. PTT communication.
  • the receiver 2301 is further configured to receive a call end message sent by the server, where the call end message carries the group
  • the processor 2304 is further configured to delete the predefined area information of the group saved on the memory 2303.
  • the terminal provided in this embodiment may be used to perform the technical solution implemented by the method shown in FIG. 7 or FIG. 8 and the corresponding part of the paging terminal in the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 9, and the implementation principle and technical effect are similar. , will not repeat them here.
  • Figure 23 is only a schematic diagram of the structure of the communication device provided by the present invention, and the specific structure can be adjusted according to the actual situation.
  • the invention further provides a computer program product embodiment 1 comprising a computer readable medium, the computer readable medium comprising a set of program code for performing the method as described in the method embodiment shown in Fig. 1 or Fig. 2.
  • the invention further provides a computer program product embodiment 2, comprising a computer readable medium, the computer readable medium comprising a set of program code for performing the method as described in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 3 or FIG.
  • the invention further provides a computer program product embodiment 3, comprising a computer readable medium, the computer readable medium comprising a set of program code for performing the method as described in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 5 or FIG.
  • the invention further provides a fourth embodiment of a computer program product, comprising a computer readable medium comprising a set of program code for performing the method as described in the method embodiment shown in Fig. 7 or Fig. 8.
  • the aforementioned program can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the program when executed, performs the steps including the foregoing method embodiments; and the foregoing storage medium includes: a medium that can store program codes, such as a ROM, a RAM, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Provided in an embodiment of the present invention are a PTT communication method, server, terminal and system, the method comprising: a server receives a PTT communication establishment request transmitted by a terminal, the PTT communication establishment request carrying a group identifier and the cell identifier of a cell where the terminal is currently located; querying, according to the group identifier, the predefined area information of a group corresponding to the group identifier; determining whether the terminal is located in the predefined area of the group according to the queried predefined area information and the cell identifier of the cell where the terminal is currently located; and transmitting a PTT communication establishment response to the terminal according to the determination result. The PTT communication method, server, terminal and system provided in the embodiment of the present invention reduce the implementation cost of the PTT communication in a predefined area.

Description

PTT通信方法、 服务器、 终端及系统 技术领域  PTT communication method, server, terminal and system
本发明实施例涉及通信技术, 尤其涉及一种 ΡΤΤ通信方法、 服务器、 终 端及系统。 背景技术  The embodiments of the present invention relate to communication technologies, and in particular, to a communication method, a server, a terminal, and a system. Background technique
按讲(Push To Talk, 简称 PTT )通信, 是归属同一群组的多个成员之间 的半双工通信方式。 其基本形式为: 某用户按住终端上的 PTT按钮, 其媒体 流即可通过通信网络传送给同一群组的成员; 松开 PTT按钮后, 媒体流即停 止传送。 预定义区域的 PTT通信, 是指同一群组内的用户只能在预定义区域 内进行 PTT通信, 其特点为: 当某群组正在进行 PTT通信时, 如果某个群组 成员移动至该群组的预定义区域之外, 则他将退出该次 PTT通信; 如果归属 于该群组的某个成员进入该群组的预定义区域, 则他将加入该次 PTT通信。  Push To Talk (referred to as PTT) communication is a half-duplex communication method between multiple members belonging to the same group. The basic form is as follows: When a user presses the PTT button on the terminal, the media stream can be transmitted to the members of the same group through the communication network; after the PTT button is released, the media stream stops transmitting. PTT communication in a predefined area means that users in the same group can only perform PTT communication in a predefined area. The characteristics are: When a group is performing PTT communication, if a group member moves to the group Outside the predefined area of the group, he will exit the PTT communication; if a member belonging to the group enters the predefined area of the group, he will join the PTT communication.
目前, 无线通信系统如全球铁路移动通信系统 ( Globle System for Currently, wireless communication systems such as the Global Railway Mobile Communication System (Globle System for
Mobile Communications for Railways, 简称: GSM-R ) 中, 实现了预定义区 域的 PTT通信, 然而需要对核心网和接入网的控制面信令进行修改, 在信令 处理流程中增加 PTT通信的信息, 从而需要修改无线网络的核心网和接入网 网元的配置, 例如, 在 GSM-R网络中, 需要修改移动交换中心 (Mobile Switching Centre, 简称: MSC ) 、 多媒体网关 ( Multimedia Media Gateway, 简称: MGW ) 、 归属位置寄存器(Home Location Register, 简称: HLR ) 、 基站控制器( Base Station Controller, 简称: BSC ) 、 基站 ( Base Transceiver Station, 简称: BTS )等的配置, 而对于目前已投入使用的无线网络, 要实现 预定义区域的 PTT通信, 就必须更新或升级核心网和接入网网元, 需要花费 极大的成本代价, 不便于业务的部署。 发明内容 Mobile Communications for Railways (abbreviation: GSM-R) implements PTT communication in a predefined area. However, it is necessary to modify the control plane signaling of the core network and the access network, and add PTT communication information in the signaling processing flow. Therefore, it is necessary to modify the configuration of the core network of the wireless network and the access network element. For example, in the GSM-R network, the Mobile Switching Centre (MSC) and the Multimedia Gateway (Multimedia Gateway) need to be modified. : MGW ), Home Location Register (HLR), Base Station Controller (BSC), Base Transceiver Station (BTS), etc., and are currently in use. In order to implement PTT communication in a predefined area, it is necessary to update or upgrade the core network and the access network element, which requires a great cost and is inconvenient for service deployment. Summary of the invention
本发明实施例提供一种 PTT通信方法、 服务器、 终端及系统, 以降低预 定义区域的 PTT通信的实现成本。 第一方面, 本发明实施例提供一种 PTT通信方法, 包括: 服务器接收终 端发送的 PTT通信建立请求,所述 PTT通信建立请求中携带群组标识和所述 终端当前所在小区的小区标识; 才艮据所述群组标识, 查询所述群组标识对应 的群组的预定义区域信息; 根据查询到的预定义区域信息和所述终端当前所 在小区的小区标识, 判断所述终端是否位于所述群组的预定义区域内; 根据 判断结果, 向所述终端发送 PTT通信建立响应。 Embodiments of the present invention provide a PTT communication method, server, terminal, and system to reduce implementation cost of PTT communication in a predefined area. In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a PTT communication method, including: a server receiving a PTT communication establishment request sent by a terminal, where the PTT communication establishment request carries a group identifier and a cell identifier of a cell where the terminal is currently located; Determining the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier according to the group identifier; determining whether the terminal is located according to the predefined area information that is queried and the cell identifier of the current cell of the terminal In the predefined area of the group; according to the judgment result, the PTT communication establishment response is sent to the terminal.
根据第一方面, 在第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述根据判断 结果, 向所述终端发送 PTT通信建立响应, 包括: 如果所述终端位于所述群 组的预定义区域之内, 向所述终端发送 PTT通信建立响应, 所述 PTT通信建 立响应中携带所述群组标识、 所述群组的预定义区域信息, 其中, 所述 PTT 通信建立响应包括 PTT通信已建立消息或 PTT通信允许建立消息。  According to the first aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the sending, according to the determining result, the PTT communication setup response to the terminal, includes: if the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group Transmitting a PTT communication setup response to the terminal, where the PTT communication setup response carries the group identifier, the predefined area information of the group, where the PTT communication setup response includes PTT communication established. Message or PTT communication allows the establishment of a message.
根据第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第一方面的第二种可能的实 现方式中, 如果所述终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之内, 向所述终端发送 According to a first possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in a second possible implementation manner of the first aspect, if the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group, sending the terminal to the terminal
PTT通信建立响应具体包括: 如果所述群组标识对应的群组的 PTT通信已建 立, 则向所述终端发送 PTT通信已建立消息; 如果所述群组标识对应的群组 的 PTT通信未建立, 则向所述终端发送 PTT通信允许建立消息。 The PTT communication establishment response specifically includes: if the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier is established, sending a PTT communication established message to the terminal; if the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier is not established And sending a PTT communication permission establishment message to the terminal.
根据第一方面的第二种可能的实现方式, 在第一方面的第三种可能的实 现方式中, 如果所述群组标识对应的群组的 PTT通信未建立, 则还包括: 向 所述群组的其它终端发送寻呼消息 , 所述寻呼消息中携带所述群组的群组标 识和所述群组的预定义区域信息; 接收所述群组的其它终端通过无线 IP网络 发送的寻呼响应消息, 所述寻呼响应消息中携带所述群组的群组标识, 所述 寻呼响应消息是所述其它终端在根据自身当前所在小区的小区标识判断当前 处于所述预定义区域之内后发送的。  According to the second possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the first aspect, if the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier is not established, the method further includes: The other terminal of the group sends a paging message, where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group; and the other terminals that receive the group send through the wireless IP network. a paging response message, where the paging response message carries the group identity of the group, and the paging response message is that the other terminal is determined to be currently in the predefined area according to the cell identity of the cell in which the current cell is located. Sent within and after.
根据第一方面, 在第一方面的第四种可能的实现方式中, 所述根据判断 结果, 向所述终端发送 PTT通信建立响应, 包括: 如果所述终端位于所述群 组的预定义区域之外, 向所述终端发送 PTT通信建立响应, 其中, 所述 PTT 通信建立响应包括 PTT通信建立失败的消息。  According to the first aspect, in a fourth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the sending, according to the determining result, the PTT communication setup response to the terminal, includes: if the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group In addition, a PTT communication setup response is sent to the terminal, where the PTT communication setup response includes a message that the PTT communication setup fails.
根据第一方面、 第一方面的第一种至第四种可能的实现方式中的任意一 种, 在第一方面的第五种可能的实现方式中, 当所述群组的任一终端离开所 述群组的预定义区域时, 所述方法还包括: 接收所述离开的终端发送的离开 预定义区域的消息, 所述离开预定义区域的消息中携带所述离开的终端的终 端标识和所述群组的群组标识;将所述离开的终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。 According to the first aspect, any one of the first to fourth possible implementation manners of the first aspect, in a fifth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, when any terminal of the group leaves When the predefined area of the group is used, the method further includes: receiving a departure sent by the leaving terminal a message of the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the leaving terminal and the group identity of the group; and the left terminal is moved out of the PTT communication of the group.
根据第一方面、 第一方面的第一种至第五种可能的实现方式中的任意一 种, 在第一方面的第六种可能的实现方式中, 当所述群组的任一终端进入所 述群组的预定义区域时, 所述方法还包括: 接收所述进入的终端发送的进入 预定义区域的消息, 所述进入预定义区域的消息中携带所述进入的终端的终 端标识和所述群组的群组标识;将所述进入的终端加入所述群组的 PTT通信。  According to the first aspect, any one of the first to fifth possible implementation manners of the first aspect, in a sixth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, when any terminal of the group enters When the predefined area of the group is used, the method further includes: receiving a message that is sent by the ingress terminal to enter a predefined area, where the message that enters the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the incoming terminal and a group identity of the group; adding the entered terminal to a PTT communication of the group.
根据第一方面、 第一方面的第一种至第六种可能的实现方式中的任意一 种, 在第一方面的第七种可能的实现方式中, 当所述群组的任一终端欲结束 PPT通信时, 所述方法还包括: 接收所述欲结束 PPT通信的终端发送呼叫结 束请求; 向所述群组的所有终端发送呼叫结束消息, 以使所述群组的所有终 端删除所述群组的预定义区域信息。  According to the first aspect, any one of the first to sixth possible implementation manners of the first aspect, in a seventh possible implementation manner of the first aspect, When the PPT communication is ended, the method further includes: receiving, by the terminal that wants to end PPT communication, a call termination request; sending a call end message to all terminals of the group, so that all terminals of the group delete the Predefined area information for the group.
第二方面, 本发明实施例提供一种 PTT通信方法, 包括: 终端向服务器 发送 PTT通信建立请求,所述 PTT通信建立请求中携带群组标识和所述终端 当前所在小区的小区标识; 接收所述服务器发送的 PTT通信建立响应, 所述 PTT通信建立响应是所述服务器根据所述群组标识对应的群组的预定义区域 信息和所述终端当前所在小区的小区标识, 判断所述终端是否位于所述群组 的预定义区域内并根据判断结果发送的; 根据所述 PPT通信建立响应, 确定 是否加入所述 PPT通信。  In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a PTT communication method, including: a terminal sending a PTT communication establishment request to a server, where the PTT communication establishment request carries a group identifier and a cell identifier of a cell where the terminal is currently located; Determining, by the server, a PTT communication establishment response, where the PTT communication establishment response is that the server determines, according to the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier, and the cell identifier of the current cell of the terminal, Located in a predefined area of the group and sent according to the judgment result; determining whether to join the PPT communication according to the PPT communication establishment response.
根据第二方面, 在第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述 PTT通信 建立响应是在所述服务器判断所述终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之外时发 送的, 其中所述 PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信建立失败的消息。  According to the second aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the PTT communication setup response is sent when the server determines that the terminal is located outside a predefined area of the group, where The PTT communication setup response includes a message that the PTT communication setup failed.
根据第二方面, 在第二方面的第二种可能的实现方式中, 所述 PTT通信 建立响应是在所述服务器判断所述终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之内时发 送的, 所述 PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信已建立消息或 PTT通信允许建 立消息, 且所述 PTT通信建立响应中携带所述群组的群组标识、 所述群组的 预定义区域信息。  According to the second aspect, in a second possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the PTT communication setup response is sent when the server determines that the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group. The PTT communication setup response includes a PTT communication established message or a PTT communication permission establishment message, and the PTT communication establishment response carries the group identifier of the group, and the predefined area information of the group.
根据在第二方面的第二种可能的实现方式, 在第二方面的第三种可能的 实现方式中, 所述接收所述服务器发送的 PTT通信建立响应之后, 还包括: 保存所述群组的预定义区域信息。 根据在第二方面的第三种可能的实现方式, 在第二方面的第四种可能的 实现方式中, 当所述终端移动时, 还包括: 根据保存的预定义区域信息和所 述终端移动至小区的小区标识判断所述终端是否离开所述群组的预定义区 域; 当判断结果为是时, 向所述服务器发送离开预定义区域的消息, 所述离 开预定义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识和群组标识, 以使所述服务 器将所述终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。 According to the second possible implementation manner of the second aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the second aspect, after the receiving the PTT communication setup response sent by the server, the method further includes: saving the group Predefined area information. According to a third possible implementation manner of the second aspect, in a fourth possible implementation manner of the second aspect, when the terminal moves, the method further includes: moving, according to the saved predefined area information, the terminal Determining, by the cell identifier of the cell, whether the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group; when the determination result is yes, sending a message leaving the predefined area to the server, where the message leaving the predefined area carries Determining the terminal identifier and the group identifier of the terminal, so that the server moves the terminal out of the PTT communication of the group.
根据在第二方面的第四种可能的实现方式, 在第二方面的第五种可能的 实现方式中, 所述向所述服务器发送离开预定义区域的消息之后, 还包括: 当所述终端再次移动时, 根据保存的预定义区域信息和所述终端移动至小区 的小区标识判断所述终端是否进入所述群组的预定义区域; 当判断结果为是 时, 向所述服务器发送进入预定义区域的消息, 所述进入预定义区域的消息 中携带终端标识和群组标识, 以使所述服务器将所述终端加入所述群组的 According to the fourth possible implementation manner of the second aspect, in a fifth possible implementation manner of the second aspect, after the sending the message that is to leave the predefined area to the server, the method further includes: when the terminal When moving again, determining whether the terminal enters a predefined area of the group according to the saved predefined area information and the cell identifier of the terminal moving to the cell; when the determination result is yes, sending the advancement to the server Defining a message of the area, where the message entering the predefined area carries a terminal identifier and a group identifier, so that the server joins the terminal to the group
PTT通信。 PTT communication.
根据在第二方面的第三种可能的实现方式, 在第二方面的第六种可能的 实现方式中, 所述保存所述群组的预定义区域信息之后, 还包括: 接收所述 服务器发送的呼叫结束消息 ,所述呼叫结束消息中携带所述群组的群组标识; 删除本地保存的所述群组的预定义区域信息。  According to a third possible implementation manner of the second aspect, in a sixth possible implementation manner of the second aspect, after the saving the predefined area information of the group, the method further includes: receiving, sending, by the server a call end message, the call end message carrying the group identifier of the group; deleting the locally saved predefined area information of the group.
第三方面, 本发明实施例提供一种 PTT通信方法, 包括: 服务器确定允 许建立群组的 PTT通信;向所述群组的终端发送所述群组的 PTT通信的寻呼 消息 , 所述寻呼消息中携带所述群组的群组标识和所述群组的预定义区域信 息。  In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a PTT communication method, including: determining, by a server, a PTT communication that allows a group to be established; and transmitting, to the terminal of the group, a paging message of a PTT communication of the group, where the The call message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group.
根据第三方面, 在第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 接收所述群组 的终端发送的寻呼响应消息,所述寻呼响应消息中携带所述群组的群组标识, 所述寻呼响应消息是所述终端在根据自身当前小区的小区标识判断当前处于 所述预定义区域之内后发送的  According to the third aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the paging response message sent by the terminal of the group is received, where the paging response message carries the group identifier of the group, The paging response message is sent by the terminal after determining that the terminal is currently within the predefined area according to the cell identity of the current cell of the current cell.
根据第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第三方面的第二 种可能的实现方式中, 当所述群组的任一终端离开所述群组的预定义区域时, 还包括: 接收所述离开的终端发送的离开预定义区域的消息, 所述离开预定 义区域的消息中携带所述离开的终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识; 将 所述离开的终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。 根据在第三方面或第三方面的第一种或第二种可能的实现方式, 在第三 方面的第三种可能的实现方式中, 当所述群组的任一终端进入所述群组的预 定义区域时, 所述向所述群组的终端发送所述群组的 PTT通信的寻呼消息之 后, 或所述接收所述群组的终端发送的离开预定义区域的消息之后, 还包括: 接收所述群组的终端发送的进入预定义区域的消息, 所述进入预定义区域的 消息中携带终端标识和群组标识; 将所述终端加入所述群组的 PTT通信。 According to the third aspect or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a second possible implementation manner of the third aspect, when any terminal of the group leaves a predefined area of the group And the message that is sent by the leaving terminal to leave the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the leaving terminal and the group identifier of the group; The leaving terminal moves out of the group's PTT communication. According to the third aspect or the first or second possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the third aspect, when any terminal of the group enters the group After the pre-defined area is sent, after the paging message of the PTT communication of the group is sent to the terminal of the group, or after the message of the pre-defined area sent by the terminal receiving the group, The method includes: receiving a message that is sent by a terminal of the group to enter a predefined area, where the message entering the predefined area carries a terminal identifier and a group identifier; and the terminal is added to the PTT communication of the group.
根据在第三方面、 第三方面的第一种至第三种可能的实现方式中的任意 一种, 在第三方面的第四种可能的实现方式中, 当所述群组的任一终端欲结 束 PPT通信时, 还包括: 接收所述欲结束 PPT通信的终端发送的呼叫结束请 求; 向所述群组的所有终端发送呼叫结束消息, 以使所述群组的所有终端删 除所述群组的预定义区域信息。  According to the third aspect, any one of the first to third possible implementation manners of the third aspect, in a fourth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, when any terminal of the group When the PPT communication is to be ended, the method further includes: receiving a call end request sent by the terminal that wants to end the PPT communication; sending a call end message to all terminals of the group, so that all the terminals of the group delete the group Predefined area information for the group.
第四方面, 本发明实施例提供一种 PTT通信方法, 包括: 终端接收服务 器发送的群组的 PTT通信的寻呼消息, 所述寻呼消息中携带所述群组的群组 标识和所述群组的预定义区域信息; 对应所述群组标识, 保存所述群组的预 定义区域信息。  In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a PTT communication method, including: receiving, by a terminal, a paging message of a PTT communication of a group sent by a server, where the paging message carries a group identifier of the group and the Pre-defined area information of the group; corresponding to the group identifier, pre-defined area information of the group is saved.
根据第四方面, 在第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 根据所述终端 当前所在小区的小区标识和所述预定义区域信息判断当前是否位于所述群组 的预定义区域之内; 如果所述终端当前位于所述群组的预定义区域之内, 向 所述服务器发送寻呼响应消息 , 所述寻呼响应消息中携带所述群组的群组标 识。  According to the fourth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, determining, according to the cell identifier of the cell where the terminal is currently located, and the predefined area information, whether the current location is within the predefined area of the group. And if the terminal is currently located in the predefined area of the group, sending a paging response message to the server, where the paging response message carries the group identifier of the group.
根据在第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第四方面的第二种可能的 实现方式中, 如果所述终端当前位于所述群组的预定义区域之外, 且所述终 端移动之后, 还包括: 根据保存的预定义区域信息和所述终端移动至小区的 小区标识确定所述终端是否进入所述群组的预定义区域; 当所述终端进入所 述群组的预定义区域之内时, 向所述服务器发送进入预定义区域的消息, 所 述进入预定义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标 识, 以使所述服务器将所述终端加入所述群组的 PTT通信。  According to the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in a second possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, if the terminal is currently located outside a predefined area of the group, and the terminal moves After the method, the method further includes: determining, according to the saved predefined area information and the cell identifier of the terminal moving to the cell, whether the terminal enters a predefined area of the group; when the terminal enters a predefined area of the group Sending a message to the server to enter a predefined area, where the message entering the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group, so that the server will The terminal joins the PTT communication of the group.
根据在第四方面的第一种或第二种可能的实现方式, 在第四方面的第三 种可能的实现方式中, 所述向所述服务器发送进入预定义区域的消息, 或所 述向所述服务器发送寻呼响应消息之后, 当所述终端移动时, 还包括: 根据 保存的预定义区域信息和所述终端移动至小区的小区标识确定所述终端是否 离开所述群组的预定义区域; 当所述终端离开所述群组的预定义区域时, 向 所述服务器发送离开预定义区域的消息, 所述离开预定义区域的消息中携带 所述终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识, 以使所述服务器将所述终端移 出所述群组的 PTT通信。 According to the first or second possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the message that is sent to the server to enter a predefined area, or the direction After the server sends the paging response message, when the terminal moves, the method further includes: Preserving the predefined area information and the cell identity of the terminal moving to the cell determining whether the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group; when the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group, to the server Sending a message leaving the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identity of the group, so that the server moves the terminal out of the PTT of the group Communication.
根据在第四方面、 第四方面的第一种至第三种可能的实现方式中的任意 一种, 在第四方面的第四种可能的实现方式中, 所述接收服务器发送的群组 的 PTT通信的寻呼消息之后,还包括:接收所述服务器发送的呼叫结束消息, 所述呼叫结束消息中携带所述群组的群组标识; 删除本地保存的所述群组的 预定义区域信息。  According to the fourth aspect, the first to the third possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in a fourth possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, After the paging message of the PTT communication, the method further includes: receiving a call end message sent by the server, where the call end message carries a group identifier of the group; deleting pre-defined area information of the group saved locally .
第五方面, 本发明实施例提供一种服务器, 包括: 接收模块, 用于接收 终端发送的 PTT通信建立请求,所述 PTT通信建立请求中携带群组标识和所 述终端当前所在小区的小区标识; 查询模块, 用于根据所述群组标识, 查询 所述群组标识对应的群组的预定义区域信息; 判断模块, 用于根据查询到的 预定义区域信息和所述终端当前所在小区的小区标识, 判断所述终端是否位 于所述群组的预定义区域内; 发送模块, 用于根据判断结果, 向所述终端发 送 PTT通信建立响应。  According to a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a server, including: a receiving module, configured to receive a PTT communication establishment request sent by a terminal, where the PTT communication establishment request carries a group identifier and a cell identifier of a cell where the terminal is currently located a querying module, configured to query, according to the group identifier, predefined area information of a group corresponding to the group identifier, and a determining module, configured to: according to the predefined area information that is queried and the current cell of the terminal a cell identifier, determining whether the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group; and sending, by the sending module, a PTT communication establishment response to the terminal according to the determination result.
根据第五方面, 在第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 当所述终端位 于所述群组的预定义区域之内时,所述 PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信已建 立消息或 PTT通信允许建立消息,且所述 PTT通信建立响应中携带所述群组 标识、 所述群组的预定义区域信息。  According to the fifth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, when the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group, the PTT communication establishment response includes a PTT communication established message or a PTT The communication allows a message to be established, and the PTT communication setup response carries the group identifier, the predefined area information of the group.
根据第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第五方面的第二种可能的实 现方式中, 所述发送模块具体用于: 如果所述群组标识对应的群组的 PTT通 信已建立, 则向所述终端发送 PTT通信已建立消息; 如果所述群组标识对应 的群组的 PTT通信未建立, 则向所述终端发送 PTT通信允许建立消息。  According to the first possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in a second possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the sending module is specifically configured to: if the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier is established And sending a PTT communication established message to the terminal; if the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier is not established, sending a PTT communication permission establishment message to the terminal.
根据第五方面的第二种可能的实现方式, 在第五方面的第三种可能的实 现方式中, 所述发送模块还用于: 如果所述群组标识对应的群组的 PTT通信 未建立, 则向所述群组的其它终端发送寻呼消息, 所述寻呼消息中携带所述 群组标识和所述群组的预定义区域信息; 所述接收模块还用于, 接收所述群 组的其它终端发送的寻呼响应消息, 所述寻呼响应消息中携带所述所述群组 的群组标识, 所述寻呼响应消息是所述其它终端在根据自身当前所在小区的 小区标识判断当前处于所述预定义区域之内后发送的。 According to a second possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the sending module is further configured to: if the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier is not established And sending a paging message to the other terminal of the group, where the paging message carries the group identifier and the predefined area information of the group; the receiving module is further configured to: receive the group a paging response message sent by another terminal of the group, where the paging response message carries the group The group identifier, the paging response message is sent by the other terminal after determining that the current location is within the predefined area according to the cell identity of the cell in which the current cell is located.
根据第五方面, 在第五方面的第四种可能的实现方式中, 所述发送模块 具体用于: 如果所述终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之外, 向所述终端发送 PTT通信建立响应, 其中, 所述 PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信建立失败的 消息。  According to the fifth aspect, in a fourth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the sending module is specifically configured to: send the PTT communication to the terminal if the terminal is located outside a predefined area of the group Establishing a response, wherein the PTT communication establishment response includes a message that the PTT communication establishment fails.
根据第五方面、 第五方面的第一种至第四种可能的实现方式中的任意一 种, 在第五方面的第五种可能的实现方式中, 当所述群组的任一终端离开所 述群组的预定义区域时, 所述接收模块, 还用于接收所述离开的终端发送的 离开预定义区域的消息, 所述离开预定义区域的消息中携带所述离开的终端 的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识;  According to the fifth aspect, any one of the first to fourth possible implementation manners of the fifth aspect, in a fifth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, when any terminal of the group leaves The receiving module is further configured to receive a message that is sent by the leaving terminal to leave a predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal of the leaving terminal Identifying and group identification of the group;
还包括: 移出模块, 用于将所述离开的终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。 根据第五方面、 第五方面的第一种至第五种可能的实现方式中的任意一 种, 在第五方面的第六种可能的实现方式中, 当所述群组的任一终端进入所 述群组的预定义区域时, 所述接收模块, 还用于接收所述群组的终端发送的 进入预定义区域的消息, 所述进入预定义区域的消息中携带所述进入的终端 的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识; 所述服务器还包括: 加入模块, 用于将 所述进入的终端加入所述群组的 PTT通信。  The method further includes: a removal module, configured to move the leaving terminal out of the group of PTT communications. According to the fifth aspect, any one of the first to fifth possible implementation manners of the fifth aspect, in a sixth possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, when any terminal of the group enters The receiving module is further configured to receive a message that is sent by the terminal of the group to enter a predefined area, where the message entering the predefined area carries the entered terminal The terminal identifier and the group identifier of the group; the server further includes: an adding module, configured to join the incoming terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
根据第五方面、 第五方面的第一种至第六种可能的实现方式中的任意一 种, 在第五方面的第七种可能的实现方式中, 当所述群组的任一终端欲结束 PPT通信时, 所述接收模块, 还用于接收所述欲结束 PPT通信的终端发送呼 叫结束请求; 所述发送模块, 还用于向所述群组的所有终端发送呼叫结束消 息, 以使所述群组的所有终端删除所述群组的预定义区域信息。  According to the fifth aspect, any one of the first to the sixth possible implementation manners of the fifth aspect, in a seventh possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, The receiving module is further configured to receive, by the terminal that is to end the PPT communication, a call termination request, where the sending module is further configured to send a call end message to all terminals of the group, so that All terminals of the group delete the predefined area information of the group.
第六方面, 本发明实施例提供一种终端, 包括: 发送模块, 用于向服务 器发送 PTT通信建立请求 ,所述 PTT通信建立请求中携带群组标识和所述终 端当前所在小区的小区标识; 接收模块, 用于接收所述服务器发送的 PTT通 信建立响应, 所述 PTT通信建立响应是所述服务器根据所述群组标识对应的 群组的预定义区域信息和所述终端当前所在小区的小区标识, 判断所述终端 是否位于所述群组的预定义区域内并根据判断结果发送的; 处理模块, 用于 根据所述 PPT通信建立响应, 确定是否加入所述 PPT通信。 根据第六方面, 在第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 当所述 PTT通 信建立响应是在所述服务器判断所述终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之外时 发送的时, 所述 PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信建立失败的消息。 According to a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a terminal, including: a sending module, configured to send a PTT communication establishment request to a server, where the PTT communication establishment request carries a group identifier and a cell identifier of a cell where the terminal is currently located; a receiving module, configured to receive a PTT communication setup response sent by the server, where the PTT communication setup response is a predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier by the server, and a cell of a cell where the terminal is currently located And determining, by the processing module, whether the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group and sent according to the determination result, and determining, by the PPT communication establishment response, whether to join the PPT communication. According to the sixth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, when the PTT communication setup response is sent when the server determines that the terminal is located outside a predefined area of the group The PTT communication establishment response includes a message that the PTT communication establishment fails.
根据第六方面, 在第六方面的第二种可能的实现方式中, 当所述 PTT通 信建立响应是在所述服务器判断所述终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之内时 发送的时, 所述 PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信已建立消息和 PTT通信允 许建立消息, 且携带所述群组的群组标识、 所述群组的预定义区域信息。  According to the sixth aspect, in a second possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, when the PTT communication setup response is sent when the server determines that the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group And the PTT communication establishment response includes a PTT communication established message and a PTT communication permission establishment message, and carries the group identifier of the group, and the predefined area information of the group.
根据第六方面的第二种可能的实现方式, 在第六方面的第三种可能的实 现方式中, 还包括: 存储模块, 用于保存所述群组的预定义区域信息。  According to a second possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the method further includes: a storage module, configured to save the predefined area information of the group.
根据第六方面的第三种可能的实现方式, 在第六方面的第四种可能的实 现方式中, 还包括: 区域监控模块, 用于当所述终端移动时, 根据保存的预 定义区域信息和所述终端移动至小区的小区标识判断所述终端是否离开所述 群组的预定义区域; 所述发送模块还用于, 若所述区域监控模块判断所述终 端离开所述群组的预定义区域, 则, 向所述服务器发送离开预定义区域的消 息, 所述离开预定义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识和群组标识, 以 使所述服务器将所述终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。  According to a third possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in a fourth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the method further includes: an area monitoring module, configured to: when the terminal moves, according to the saved predefined area information And the cell identifier that is sent by the terminal to the cell to determine whether the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group; the sending module is further configured to: if the area monitoring module determines that the terminal leaves the group Defining an area, sending a message leaving the predefined area to the server, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier and the group identifier of the terminal, so that the server moves the terminal out of the Group PTT communication.
根据第六方面的第四种可能的实现方式, 在第六方面的第五种可能的实 现方式中, 所述区域监控模块还用于, 当所述终端再次移动时, 根据保存的 预定义区域信息和所述终端移动至小区的小区标识判断判断所述终端是否进 入所述群组的预定义区域; 所述发送模块还用于, 若所述区域监控模块判断 所述终端进入所述群组的预定义区域, 则向所述服务器发送进入预定义区域 的消息, 所述进入预定义区域的消息中携带终端标识和群组标识, 以使所述 服务器将所述终端加入所述群组的 PTT通信。  According to a fourth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in a fifth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the area monitoring module is further configured to: when the terminal moves again, according to the saved predefined area The information and the cell identifier of the terminal moving to the cell determine whether the terminal enters a predefined area of the group; the sending module is further configured to: if the area monitoring module determines that the terminal enters the group a predefined area, the message sent to the predefined area is sent to the server, where the message entering the predefined area carries the terminal identifier and the group identifier, so that the server joins the terminal to the group. PTT communication.
根据第六方面的第三种可能的实现方式, 在第六方面的第六种可能的实 现方式中, 所述接收模块还用于, 接收所述服务器发送的呼叫结束消息, 所 述呼叫结束消息中携带所述群组的群组标识; 还包括: 删除模块, 用于删除 本地保存的所述群组的预定义区域信息。  According to a third possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in a sixth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the receiving module is further configured to: receive a call end message sent by the server, the call end message The group identifier of the group is carried in the group; and the deleting module is configured to delete the predefined area information of the group that is locally saved.
第七方面, 本发明实施例提供一种服务器, 其特征在于, 包括: 处理模 块, 用于确定允许建立群组的 PTT通信; 发送模块, 用于向所述群组的终端 发送所述群组的 PTT通信的寻呼消息, 所述寻呼消息中携带所述群组的群组 标识和所述群组的预定义区域信息。 According to a seventh aspect, the embodiment of the present invention provides a server, including: a processing module, configured to determine a PTT communication that is allowed to establish a group; and a sending module, configured to send the group to the terminal of the group Paging message of the PTT communication, the paging message carrying the group of the group Identify and pre-defined area information for the group.
根据第七方面, 在第七方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 还包括: 接收 模块, 用于接收所述群组的终端发送的寻呼响应消息, 所述寻呼响应消息中 携带所述群组的群组标识, 所述寻呼响应消息是所述终端在根据自身当前小 区的小区标识判断当前处于所述预定义区域之内后发送的。  According to the seventh aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, the method further includes: a receiving module, configured to receive a paging response message sent by the terminal of the group, where the paging response message carries The group identity of the group, the paging response message is sent by the terminal after determining that the terminal is currently within the predefined area according to the cell identity of the current cell.
根据第七方面, 在第七方面的第二种可能的实现方式中, 当所述群组的 任一终端离开所述群组的预定义区域时, 所述接收模块还用于, 接收所述离 开的终端发送的离开预定义区域的消息, 所述离开预定义区域的消息中携带 所述离开的终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识; 所述服务器还包括: 移 出模块, 用于将所述离开的终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。  According to the seventh aspect, in a second possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, when any terminal of the group leaves a predefined area of the group, the receiving module is further configured to receive the a message sent by the leaving terminal to leave the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the leaving terminal and the group identifier of the group; the server further includes: a removal module, The PTT communication of the group is moved out of the leaving terminal.
根据第七方面或第七方面的第一种或第二种可能的实现方式, 在第七方 面的第三种可能的实现方式中, 当所述群组的任一终端进入所述群组的预定 义区域时, 所述接收模块还用于, 接收所述进入的终端发送的进入预定义区 域的消息, 所述进入预定义区域的消息中携带所述进入的终端的终端标识和 所述群组的群组标识; 所述服务器还包括: 加入模块, 将所述进入的终端加 入所述群组的 PTT通信。  According to the seventh aspect or the first or second possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, when any terminal of the group enters the group The receiving module is further configured to: receive a message that is sent by the ingress terminal and enter a predefined area, where the message that enters the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the incoming terminal and the group The group identifier of the group; the server further includes: an adding module, adding the entered terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
根据第七方面或第七方面的第一种至第三种可能的实现方式中的任意一 种, 在第七方面的第四种可能的实现方式中, 当所述群组的任一终端欲结束 According to the seventh aspect, or any one of the first to the third possible implementation manners of the seventh aspect, in a fourth possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, End
PPT通信时, 所述接收模块还用于, 在所述接收所述欲结束 PPT通信的终端 发送的寻呼响应消息之后, 接收所述群组的终端发送的呼叫结束请求; 所述 发送模块还用于, 向所述群组的所有终端发送呼叫结束消息, 以使所述群组 的所有终端删除所述群组的预定义区域信息。 The receiving module is further configured to: after receiving the paging response message sent by the terminal that wants to end the PPT communication, receive a call end request sent by the terminal of the group; the sending module further And sending, to all terminals of the group, a call end message, so that all terminals of the group delete the predefined area information of the group.
第八方面, 本发明实施例提供一种终端, 其特征在于, 包括: 接收模块, 用于接收服务器发送的群组的 PTT通信的寻呼消息, 所述寻呼消息中携带所 述群组的群组标识和所述群组的预定义区域信息; 存储模块, 用于对应所述 群组标识, 保存所述群组的预定义区域信息。  According to an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a terminal, including: a receiving module, configured to receive a paging message of a PTT communication of a group sent by a server, where the paging message carries the group a group identifier and predefined area information of the group; a storage module, configured to save the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier.
根据第八方面, 在第八方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 还包括: 区域 监控模块, 用于根据所述终端的当前小区的小区标识和所述预定义区域信息 判断所述终端当前是否位于所述群组的预定义区域之内; 发送模块, 用于如 果所述终端当前位于所述群组的预定义区域之内, 则向所述服务器发送寻呼 响应消息, 所述寻呼响应消息中携带所述群组的群组标识。 According to the eighth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the eighth aspect, the method further includes: an area monitoring module, configured to determine, according to a cell identifier of the current cell of the terminal, and the predefined area information, Whether it is located in a predefined area of the group; a sending module, configured to send a page to the server if the terminal is currently located in a predefined area of the group In response to the message, the paging response message carries the group identity of the group.
根据第八方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第八方面的第二种可能的实 现方式中, 所述区域监控模块还用于, 如果所述终端当前位于所述群组的预 定义区域之外, 且所述终端移动之后, 根据保存的预定义区域信息和所述终 端移动至小区的小区标识确定所述终端是否进入所述群组的预定义区域; 所 述发送模块还用于, 当所述区域监控模块确定所述终端进入所述群组的预定 义区域时, 向所述服务器发送进入预定义区域的消息, 所述进入预定义区域 的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识, 以使所述服务器 将所述终端加入所述群组的 PTT通信。  According to a first possible implementation manner of the eighth aspect, in a second possible implementation manner of the eighth aspect, the area monitoring module is further configured to: if the terminal is currently located in a predefined area of the group In addition, after the terminal moves, determining whether the terminal enters a predefined area of the group according to the saved predefined area information and the cell identifier of the terminal moving to the cell; the sending module is further configured to: When the area monitoring module determines that the terminal enters a predefined area of the group, sending a message to the server to enter a predefined area, where the message entering the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and The group identity of the group, such that the server joins the terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
根据第八方面或第八方面的第一种或第二种可能的实现方式, 在第八方 面的第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述区域监控模块还用于, 在所述发送模块 向所述服务器发送进入预定义区域的消息, 或所述向所述服务器发送寻呼响 应消息之后, 当所述终端移动时, 根据保存的预定义区域信息和所述终端移 动至小区的小区标识确定所述终端是否离开所述群组的预定义区域; 所述发 送模块还用于, 当所述区域监控模块确定所述终端离开所述群组的预定义区 域时, 向所述服务器发送离开预定义区域的消息, 所述离开预定义区域的消 息中携带所述终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识, 以使所述服务器将所 述终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。  According to the eighth aspect or the first or second possible implementation manner of the eighth aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the eighth aspect, the area monitoring module is further configured to: After the server sends a message to enter a predefined area, or after sending a paging response message to the server, when the terminal moves, determining according to the saved predefined area information and the cell identity of the terminal moving to the cell Whether the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group; the sending module is further configured to: when the area monitoring module determines that the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group, send a departure pre- The message of the area is defined, and the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identity of the group, so that the server moves the terminal out of the PTT communication of the group.
根据第八方面或第八方面的第一种至第三种可能的实现方式中的任意一 种, 在第八方面的第四种可能的实现方式中, 所述接收模块还用于, 在所述 接收服务器发送的群组的 PTT通信的寻呼消息之后, 接收所述服务器发送的 呼叫结束消息, 所述呼叫结束消息中携带所述群组的群组标识; 还包括: 删 除模块, 用于删除本地保存的所述群组的预定义区域信息。  In a fourth possible implementation manner of the eighth aspect, the receiving module is further configured to: After receiving the paging message of the PTT communication of the group sent by the server, receiving the call end message sent by the server, where the call end message carries the group identifier of the group; further comprising: a deleting module, configured to: Delete the predefined area information of the group saved locally.
第九方面, 本发明实施例提供一种通信系统, 包括第五方面或第五方面的 任意一种可能的实现方式中的服务器、 一个第六方面或第六方面的任意一种 可能的实现方式中的终端以及至少一个第八方面或第八方面的任意一种可能 的实现方式中的终端。  The ninth aspect, the embodiment of the present invention provides a communication system, including the server, any one of the sixth aspect or the sixth aspect, in any one possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect or the fifth aspect And a terminal in any one of the possible implementations of the eighth aspect or the eighth aspect.
第九方面, 本发明实施例提供一种通信系统, 包括第七方面或第七方面的 任意一种可能的实现方式中的服务器以及至少一个第八方面或第八方面的任 意一种可能的实现方式中的终端。 本发明实施例提供的 PTT通信方法、 服务器、 终端及系统, 通过在 ΡΤΤ 通信建立时服务器将群组的预定义区域信息发送给该群组的所有已注册的终 端, 使终端能够判断自身当前是否位于预定该群组的预定义区域之内, 从而 实现只有在预定义区域之内才能进行 ΡΤΤ通信的功能;通过无线 IP网络实现 服务器与终端的通信, 并不需要改变移动网络中的任何网元, 从而实现了在 现有移动网络的基础上使 PTT通信具有预定义区域的功能。 附图说明 为了更清楚地说明本发明实施例或现有技术中的技术方案, 下面将对实 施例或现有技术描述中所需要使用的附图作一简单地介绍, 显而易见地, 下 面描述中的附图是本发明的一些实施例, 对于本领域普通技术人员来讲, 在 不付出创造性劳动性的前提下, 还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。 The ninth aspect, the embodiment of the present invention provides a communication system, including the server in any one of the possible implementation manners of the seventh aspect or the seventh aspect, and at least one possible implementation of the eighth aspect or the eighth aspect The terminal in the way. The PTT communication method, the server, the terminal, and the system provided by the embodiment of the present invention enable the terminal to transmit the predefined area information of the group to all the registered terminals of the group when the communication is established, so that the terminal can determine whether the current terminal is currently It is located within a predefined area of the group, so as to realize the function of communication only within the predefined area; communication between the server and the terminal through the wireless IP network does not need to change any network element in the mobile network. Thereby, the function of making the PTT communication have a predefined area based on the existing mobile network is realized. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS In order to more clearly illustrate the embodiments of the present invention or the technical solutions in the prior art, a brief description of the drawings used in the embodiments or the prior art description will be briefly described below. The drawings are some embodiments of the present invention, and those skilled in the art can obtain other drawings based on these drawings without any inventive labor.
图 1为本发明 PTT通信方法实施例一的流程图  1 is a flowchart of Embodiment 1 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention;
图 2为本发明 PTT通信方法实施例二的流程图  2 is a flowchart of Embodiment 2 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention
图 3为本发明 PTT通信方法实施例三的流程图  3 is a flowchart of Embodiment 3 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention
图 4为本发明 PTT通信方法实施例四的流程图  4 is a flowchart of Embodiment 4 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention
图 5为本发明 PTT通信方法实施例五的流程图  FIG. 5 is a flowchart of Embodiment 5 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention;
图 6为本发明 PTT通信方法实施例六的流程图  6 is a flowchart of Embodiment 6 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention.
图 7为本发明 PTT通信方法实施例七的流程图  7 is a flowchart of Embodiment 7 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention.
图 8为本发明 PTT通信方法实施例八的流程图  8 is a flowchart of Embodiment 8 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention.
图 9为本发明 PTT通信方法实施例九的信令流程图  FIG. 9 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 9 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention;
图 10为本发明服务器实施例一的结构示意图;  10 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a server according to the present invention;
图 11为本发明服务器实施例二的结构示意图;  11 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a server according to the present invention;
图 12为本发明终端实施例一的结构示意图;  12 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a terminal according to the present invention;
图 13为本发明终端实施例二的结构示意图;  13 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a terminal according to the present invention;
图 14为本发明服务器实施例三的结构示意图;  14 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 3 of a server according to the present invention;
图 15为本发明服务器实施例四的结构示意图;  15 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 4 of a server according to the present invention;
图 16为本发明终端实施例三的结构示意图;  16 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 3 of a terminal according to the present invention;
图 17为本发明终端实施例四的结构示意图;  17 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 4 of a terminal according to the present invention;
图 18为本发明通信系统实施例一的结构示意图; 图 19为本发明通信系统实施例二的结构示意图; 18 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a communication system according to the present invention; 19 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a communication system according to the present invention;
图 20为本发明服务器实施例五的结构示意图;  20 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 5 of a server according to the present invention;
图 21为本发明终端实施例五的结构示意图;  21 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 5 of a terminal according to the present invention;
图 22为本发明服务器实施例六的结构示意图;  22 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 6 of a server according to the present invention;
图 23为本发明终端实施例六的结构示意图。 具体实施方式 为使本发明实施例的目的、 技术方案和优点更加清楚, 下面将结合本发 明实施例中的附图, 对本发明实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、 完整地描述, 显然, 所描述的实施例是本发明一部分实施例, 而不是全部的实施例。 基于 本发明中的实施例, 本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创造性劳动前提下所获 得的所有其他实施例, 都属于本发明保护的范围。  FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 6 of a terminal according to the present invention. The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention are clearly and completely described in the following with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present invention. The embodiments are a part of the embodiments of the invention, and not all of the embodiments. All other embodiments obtained by a person of ordinary skill in the art based on the embodiments of the present invention without creative efforts are within the scope of the present invention.
本发明实施例在 PTT服务器的群组属性中增加至少一个群组的预定义区 域信息(例如, 对应群组的小区标识列表), 意为针对某个群组, 只有在其预 定义区域内 (例如, 小区标识列表对应的这些小区内) 才可以进行该群组的 PPT通信。 该字段可以由人工维护也可以由电脑维护, 本发明实施例不做任 何限制。 同时, 在终端的 PPT应用中增加以下功能: 保存该终端归属的且正 在进行通信的 PPT群组信息, 包括: 群组标识、群组对应的预定义区域信息。 这些保存的信息可以根据信令交互由系统自动维护; 另外, 增加实时获取终 端当前所在小区的小区标识的功能, 例如, 调用终端内无线调制解调器 ( modem )的命令接口, 从而实时获取终端当前所在小区的小区标识。 通常, 无线 modem是移动终端内的必备模块,该模块和无线网络配合完成无线传输 功能。 该模块提供命令接口供外部调用。 在接口命令集中, 可以设置查询终 端当前所在小区的小区标识的命令。  In the embodiment of the present invention, the predefined area information of at least one group is added to the group attribute of the PTT server (for example, the cell identification list of the corresponding group), which means that for a certain group, only in its predefined area ( For example, in the cells corresponding to the cell identifier list, the PPT communication of the group can be performed. This field can be maintained by the user or by the computer. The embodiment of the present invention does not impose any limitation. At the same time, the following functions are added to the PPT application of the terminal: The PPT group information that belongs to the terminal and is in communication is saved, and includes: a group identifier, and predefined area information corresponding to the group. The saved information can be automatically maintained by the system according to the signaling interaction. In addition, the function of acquiring the cell identifier of the current cell of the terminal in real time is added, for example, the command interface of the wireless modem (modem) in the terminal is called, so that the current cell of the terminal is obtained in real time. Cell identity. Generally, a wireless modem is a necessary module in a mobile terminal, and the module cooperates with a wireless network to complete a wireless transmission function. This module provides a command interface for external calls. In the interface command set, you can set the command to query the cell ID of the cell where the terminal is currently located.
如此, 终端可以将其当前所在小区的信息实时上才艮给月良务器, 同时月良务 器可以根据预存的群组的预定义区域信息, 判断终端是否在预定区域内, 从 而确定是否将终端加入该群组的 PPT通信。 如此, 仅需对服务器和终端的配 置进行修改, 无需对无线网络进行适配修改, 便可以实现预定义区域的 PPT 通信, 降低了 PPT通信对无线网络的要求, 降低了成本。  In this way, the terminal can forward the information of the cell in which it is currently located to the server in real time, and the server can determine whether the terminal is in the predetermined area according to the predefined area information of the pre-stored group, thereby determining whether The terminal joins the PPT communication of the group. In this way, only the configuration of the server and the terminal needs to be modified, and the PPT communication in the predefined area can be realized without adapting and modifying the wireless network, thereby reducing the requirement of the PPT communication to the wireless network and reducing the cost.
本发明各实施例中, 服务器与终端之间可以通过无线 IP (网络互联协议 Internet Protocol )网络进行通信, 无线 IP网络可以为任何支持 IP传输协议的 无线网络,例如移动通信运营商的无线分组网络;服务器可以为能够承载 PTT 通信应用程序,并连接无线 IP网络的计算机; 终端可以为能够承载 PTT通信 应用程序,并能够接入无线 IP网络的手持终端、车载终端等终端设备,并且, 每个终端至少归属于服务器中所保存的群组信息对应的一个群组, 即终端为 某个群组的成员。 In various embodiments of the present invention, a wireless IP (network interconnection protocol) can be used between the server and the terminal. Internet Protocol) The network communicates. The wireless IP network can be any wireless network supporting the IP transmission protocol, such as the wireless packet network of the mobile communication carrier; the server can be a computer capable of carrying the PTT communication application and connecting to the wireless IP network; It may be a terminal device capable of carrying a PTT communication application and capable of accessing a wireless IP network, such as a handheld terminal or an in-vehicle terminal, and each terminal belongs to at least one group corresponding to the group information saved in the server, that is, the terminal. Is a member of a group.
图 1为本发明 PTT通信方法实施例一的流程图, 本实施例的执行主体为 服务器。 如图 1所示, 本实施例的方法可以包括:  FIG. 1 is a flowchart of Embodiment 1 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention. The execution body of this embodiment is a server. As shown in FIG. 1, the method in this embodiment may include:
步骤 101、 服务器接收终端发送的 PTT通信建立请求, 所述 PTT通信建 立请求中携带群组标识和所述终端当前所在小区的小区标识。  Step 101: The server receives a PTT communication establishment request sent by the terminal, where the PTT communication establishment request carries a group identifier and a cell identifier of a cell where the terminal is currently located.
通常, 终端需要先打开 PTT通信应用程序, 才能与服务器进行交互。 在 打开 PTT通信应用程序时, 终端即进行登录, 具体过程为: 终端向服务器发 送注册消息, 该注册消息中携带终端标识和该终端的 IP地址。 服务器将在本 地保存终端标识和该终端的 IP地址的映射关系, 在后续的交互过程中, 该终 端将一直使用该 IP地址与服务器进行通信,直到该终端退出 PTT通信应用程 序。 在终端退出 PTT通信应用程序之后, 服务器将该终端视为离线状态, 并 将该终端的终端标识和该终端的 IP地址的映射关系删除。  Usually, the terminal needs to open the PTT communication application before it can interact with the server. When the PTT communication application is opened, the terminal logs in. The specific process is as follows: The terminal sends a registration message to the server, where the registration message carries the terminal identifier and the IP address of the terminal. The server will locally store the mapping relationship between the terminal identifier and the IP address of the terminal. During the subsequent interaction, the terminal will always use the IP address to communicate with the server until the terminal exits the PTT communication application. After the terminal exits the PTT communication application, the server regards the terminal as an offline state, and deletes the mapping relationship between the terminal identifier of the terminal and the IP address of the terminal.
步骤 101的实际场景为, 终端打开 PTT通信应用程序后, 选定其所在的 一个群组, 发送 PTT通信建立请求, 服务器则会收到一个包含群组标识和该 终端当前所在小区的小区标识的 PTT通信建立请求, 且服务器可以通过该请 求发送的 IP地址确定该终端的终端标识。并且,该 PTT通信建立请求为用户 面的请求消息, 终端可以将该请求消息通过 IP数据包的形式, 通过无线 IP 网络发送给服务器, 而不涉及通信网络中控制面信令, 终端与服务器均不会 和通信网络本身进行控制面信令通信。  The actual scenario of step 101 is: after the terminal opens the PTT communication application, selects a group in which the terminal is located, and sends a PTT communication establishment request, and the server receives a cell identifier including the group identifier and the cell currently located by the terminal. The PTT communication establishes a request, and the server can determine the terminal identifier of the terminal by using the IP address sent by the request. Moreover, the PTT communication establishment request is a request message of the user plane, and the terminal may send the request message to the server through the wireless IP network in the form of an IP data packet, without involving the control plane signaling in the communication network, and the terminal and the server are both Control plane signaling communication with the communication network itself is not performed.
步骤 102、 根据所述群组标识, 查询所述群组标识对应的群组的预定义 区域信息。  Step 102: Query, according to the group identifier, the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier.
服务器保存有各个群组的预定义区域信息, 通常, 预定义区域信息可以 为预定义区域内的所有小区的小区标识。  The server stores predefined area information of each group. Generally, the predefined area information may be a cell identifier of all cells in the predefined area.
步骤 103、 根据查询到的预定义区域信息和所述终端当前所在小区的小 区标识, 判断所述终端是否位于所述群组的预定义区域内。 具体地, 可以通过遍历预定义区域的所有小区标识, 判断终端当前所在 小区的小区标识是否与预定义区域的小区标识中的一个相匹配。 Step 103: Determine, according to the queried predefined area information and the cell identifier of the cell where the terminal is currently located, whether the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group. Specifically, by traversing all the cell identifiers of the predefined area, it is determined whether the cell identity of the cell where the terminal is currently located matches one of the cell identifiers of the predefined area.
步骤 104、 根据判断结果, 向所述终端发送 PTT通信建立响应。  Step 104: Send a PTT communication setup response to the terminal according to the judgment result.
具体地, 如果所述终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之内, 则向所述终端 发送 PTT通信建立响应 ,所述 PTT通信建立响应中携带所述群组的群组标识、 所述群组的预定义区域信息。  Specifically, if the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group, sending a PTT communication setup response to the terminal, where the PTT communication setup response carries the group identifier of the group, the group Predefined area information for the group.
PTT通信建立响应中携带该群组的群组标识, 是为了使终端可以根据该 群组标识确定该 PTT通信建立响应对应于哪个群组 , 从而确定是否加入该群 组。 PTT通信建立响应中携带该群组的预定义信息, 是为了使该群组的终端 能够自行判断自身是否位于该群组的预定义区域之内。  The PTT communication setup response carries the group identifier of the group, so that the terminal can determine, according to the group identifier, which group the PTT communication setup response corresponds to, thereby determining whether to join the group. The PTT communication setup response carries the predefined information of the group, so that the terminal of the group can determine for itself whether it is located in a predefined area of the group.
PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信已建立消息和 PTT通信允许建立消息, 具体地, 如果该终端想要建立 PTT通信的群组当前正在进行 PTT通信, 则服 务器向该终端发送 PTT通信已建立消息;如果该终端想要建立 PTT通信的群 组的 PTT通信未建立, 则服务器向该终端发送 PTT通信允许建立消息。  The PTT communication setup response includes a PTT communication established message and a PTT communication permission establishment message. Specifically, if the group that the terminal wants to establish the PTT communication is currently performing PTT communication, the server sends a PTT communication established message to the terminal; If the PTT communication of the group that the terminal wants to establish PTT communication is not established, the server sends a PTT communication permission establishment message to the terminal.
而如果所述终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之外, 则, 向所述终端发送 的 PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信建立失败的消息。  And if the terminal is located outside the predefined area of the group, the PTT communication setup response sent to the terminal includes a message that the PTT communication setup failed.
本实施例, 通过服务器在接收终端发送的 PTT通信建立请求时, 查询并 判断该终端是否位于其想要进行 PTT通信的群组的预定义区域之内, 根据判 断结果向该终端发送不同的 PTT通信建立响应,实现 PTT通信建立阶段的预 定义区域功能; 通过在判断出终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之内时, 向终 端发送的 PTT通信建立响应中携带该群组的群组标识和预定义区域信息, 以 使终端能够自行判断自身是否位于预定义区域之内, 从而使终端能够根据判 断的情况执行不同的操作, 从而实现 PTT通信过程中的预定义区域功能; 由 于以上实现预定义区域功能的过程中,通过无线 IP网络实现服务器与终端的 信息交互, 而所交互的信息对于无线 IP网络来说均是用户面的信息, 与无线 IP网络本身不需要交互, 也不涉及通信网络中控制面信令; 也就是说, 本实 施例的方法, 只需要提供支持该方法的服务器和支持该方法的终端, 该服务 器和该终端可以通过现有的任意一个无线 IP网络进行通信, 并不需要改变现 有通信网络中的任何网元, 从而实现了在现有移动网络的基础上使 PTT通信 具有预定义区域的功能, 降低了预定义区域的 PTT通信的实现成本。 图 2为本发明 PTT通信方法实施例二的流程图, 本实施例的执行主体为 服务器。 如图所示, 本实施例的方法可以包括: In this embodiment, when the server receives the PTT communication establishment request sent by the terminal, the server queries and determines whether the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group for which the PTT communication is to be performed, and sends a different PTT to the terminal according to the determination result. The communication establishment response implements a predefined area function of the PTT communication establishment phase; and when the terminal is located within the predefined area of the group, the PTT communication establishment response sent to the terminal carries the group identifier of the group And pre-defined area information, so that the terminal can determine whether it is located within the predefined area, so that the terminal can perform different operations according to the determined situation, thereby implementing the predefined area function in the PTT communication process; In the process of defining the regional function, the information exchange between the server and the terminal is realized through the wireless IP network, and the information exchanged is the information of the user plane for the wireless IP network, and does not need to interact with the wireless IP network itself, nor does it involve communication. Control plane signaling in the network; that is, the method of this embodiment, only To provide a server supporting the method and a terminal supporting the method, the server and the terminal can communicate through any existing wireless IP network, and do not need to change any network element in the existing communication network, thereby realizing Based on the existing mobile network, the PTT communication has the function of pre-defined area, which reduces the implementation cost of the PTT communication of the predefined area. 2 is a flowchart of Embodiment 2 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention. The execution body of this embodiment is a server. As shown in the figure, the method in this embodiment may include:
步骤 201、 服务器接收终端发送的 PTT通信建立请求, 所述 PTT通信建 立请求中携带群组标识和所述终端当前所在小区的小区标识。  Step 201: The server receives a PTT communication establishment request sent by the terminal, where the PTT communication establishment request carries a group identifier and a cell identifier of a cell where the terminal is currently located.
步骤 202、 根据所述群组标识, 查询所述群组标识对应的群组的预定义 区域信息。  Step 202: Query, according to the group identifier, the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier.
步骤 203、 根据查询到的预定义区域信息和所述终端当前所在小区的小 区标识, 判断所述终端是否位于所述群组的预定义区域内。  Step 203: Determine, according to the queried predefined area information and the cell identifier of the cell where the terminal is currently located, whether the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group.
步骤 204、 根据判断结果, 向所述终端发送 PTT通信建立响应。  Step 204: Send a PTT communication setup response to the terminal according to the determination result.
具体地, 如果所述终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之外, 则向所述终端 发送的 PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信建立失败的消息, 该 PTT通信建立 失败的消息中, 也可以携带失败原因, 例如: 该终端位于该群组的预定义区 域之外。  Specifically, if the terminal is located outside the predefined area of the group, the PTT communication establishment response sent to the terminal includes a message that the PTT communication establishment fails, and the PTT communication establishment failure message may also be carried. The reason for the failure, for example: The terminal is outside the predefined area of the group.
如果所述终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之内, 则向所述终端发送 PTT 通信建立响应, 所述 PTT通信建立响应中携带所述群组的群组标识、 所述群 组的预定义区域信息, PTT通信建立响应中携带该群组的群组标识和该群组 的预定义信息, 是为了使该群组的终端能够自行判断自身是否位于该群组的 预定义区域之内。 该 PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信已建立消息和 PTT通 信允许建立消息。 具体地, 如果该终端想要建立 PTT通信的群组当前正在进 行 PTT通信, 则服务器向该终端发送 PTT通信已建立消息, 这时, 该终端可 以直接加入所述群组的 PTT通信; 如果该终端想要建立 PTT通信的群组的 PTT通信未建立, 则服务器向该终端发送 PTT通信允许建立消息, 这时, 还 需要执行以下步骤才可以进行该群组的 PTT通信。  Sending a PTT communication setup response to the terminal, where the PTT communication setup response carries the group identifier of the group, and the group pre- The area information is defined, and the group identifier of the group and the predefined information of the group are carried in the PTT communication setup response, so that the terminal of the group can determine whether it is located in a predefined area of the group. The PTT communication setup response includes a PTT communication established message and a PTT communication allowed setup message. Specifically, if the group that the terminal wants to establish PTT communication is currently performing PTT communication, the server sends a PTT communication established message to the terminal, and the terminal may directly join the PTT communication of the group; If the PTT communication of the group that the terminal wants to establish the PTT communication is not established, the server sends a PTT communication permission establishment message to the terminal. In this case, the following steps are also required to perform the PTT communication of the group.
步骤 205、 向所述群组的其它终端发送寻呼消息, 所述寻呼消息中携带 所述群组的群组标识和所述群组的预定义区域信息。  Step 205: Send a paging message to the other terminals of the group, where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group.
具体地, 服务器将向该群组除了发送 PTT通信建立请求之外的所有其它 已注册的终端发送寻呼消息。 服务器对所有已注册的其它终端不进行是否在 预定义区域的判断, 而是将预定义区域信息携带在寻呼消息中发送给终端, 由终端来判断自身是否在预定义区域之内。  Specifically, the server will send a paging message to all other registered terminals of the group except for transmitting a PTT communication setup request. The server does not judge whether the other terminals are in the predefined area, but carries the predefined area information in the paging message and sends it to the terminal, and the terminal determines whether it is within the predefined area.
步骤 206、 接收所述群组的其它终端发送的寻呼响应消息, 所述寻呼响 应消息中携带所述群组的群组标识, 所述寻呼响应消息是所述其它终端在根 据自身当前所在小区的小区标识判断当前处于所述预定义区域之内后发送 的。 Step 206: Receive a paging response message sent by another terminal of the group, where the paging response is The message identifier of the group is carried in the message, and the paging response message is sent by the other terminal after determining that the terminal is currently in the predefined area according to the cell identity of the cell in which the current cell is located.
而如果终端在判断自身当前处于所述群组的预定义区域之外, 则不向所 述服务器发送寻呼响应消息。  And if the terminal determines that it is currently outside the predefined area of the group, it does not send a page response message to the server.
步骤 207、 接收所述群组的终端发送的离开预定义区域的消息, 所述离 开预定义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识。  Step 207: Receive a message that is sent by the terminal of the group to leave a predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group.
步骤 208、 将所述终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。  Step 208: Move the terminal out of the PTT communication of the group.
具体地, 步骤 208中服务器还要判断该终端是否为主讲终端: 如果该终 端为非主讲终端, 则停止向该终端发送主讲终端的媒体流; 如果该终端为主 讲终端, 则译放其话权, 并将该群组的 "是否有讲者 "的状态更新为"否", 以 使该群组正在进行 PTT通信的其它终端可以申请话权。  Specifically, in step 208, the server further determines whether the terminal is a host terminal: if the terminal is a non-talking terminal, stopping sending the media stream of the calling terminal to the terminal; if the terminal is the main terminal, translating and releasing the right to speak , and update the status of "No Speaker" of the group to "No", so that other terminals in the group that are conducting PTT communication can apply for the right to speak.
步骤 207、 208为一组可选步骤, 其具体场景为: 该群组中正在进行 PTT 通信的终端的当前小区发生变化, 当该终端判断当前已移动至该群组的预定 义区域之外时, 将向服务器发送离开预定义区域的消息, 这时, 服务器执行 步骤 207、 208。  Steps 207 and 208 are a set of optional steps, where the specific scenario is: the current cell of the terminal in the group that is undergoing PTT communication changes, when the terminal determines that the terminal has moved to a predefined area of the group. The message leaving the predefined area will be sent to the server, at which point the server performs steps 207, 208.
步骤 209、 接收所述群组的终端发送的进入预定义区域的消息, 所述进 入预定义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识。  Step 209: Receive a message that the terminal of the group sends a predefined area, where the message that enters the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group.
步骤 209、 210为一组可选步骤, 其具体场景为: 该群组的终端的当前小 区发生变化, 例如在服务器执行了步骤 207、 208之后, 该终端继续移动, 又 移动回到预定义区域之内时,该终端将向服务器发送进入预定义区域的消息, 这时, 服务器执行步骤 209、 210  Steps 209 and 210 are a set of optional steps. The specific scenario is as follows: The current cell of the terminal of the group changes. For example, after the server performs steps 207 and 208, the terminal continues to move and moves back to the predefined area. Within the time, the terminal will send a message to the server to enter the predefined area, at which time the server performs steps 209, 210.
步骤 210、 将所述终端加入所述群组的 PTT通信。  Step 210: Add the terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
具体地, 服务器向该终端发送主讲终端的媒体流。  Specifically, the server sends the media stream of the host terminal to the terminal.
步骤 211、 接收所述群组的终端发送呼叫结束请求。  Step 211: The terminal that receives the group sends a call end request.
步骤 212、 向所述群组的所有终端发送呼叫结束消息, 以使所述群组的 所有终端删除所述群组的预定义区域信息。  Step 212: Send a call end message to all terminals of the group, so that all terminals of the group delete the predefined area information of the group.
具体地 , 正在进行 PTT通信的任意一个终端均可以向服务器发送呼叫结 束请求, 服务器在收到呼叫结束请求后向该群组所有已注册的终端发送呼叫 结束消息, 以使所述终端删除所述群组的预定义区域信息。 本实施例, 通过服务器将群组的预定义区域信息发送给该群组的终端, 实现由终端在接收 PTT通信已建立消息、 PTT通信允许建立消息或寻呼消息 后、 终端的当前小区发生变化后能够判断自身是否位于该群组预定义区域之 内, 并根据判断的情况执行不同的操作, 如向服务器发送寻呼响应或不发送 寻呼响应, 向服务器发送进入预定义区域或离开预定义区域的消息, 从而实 现 PTT通信的预定义区域功能; 上述服务器与终端所有交互均是通过现有的 无线 IP网络进行的, 所有的交互信息对于通信网络来说均是用户面的信息, 不涉及通信网络控制面信令, 因此, 本实施例的方法可以不改变现有的无线Specifically, any terminal that is performing PTT communication may send a call end request to the server, and after receiving the call end request, the server sends a call end message to all registered terminals of the group, so that the terminal deletes the call. Predefined area information for the group. In this embodiment, the predefined area information of the group is sent to the terminal of the group by the server, and the current cell of the terminal changes after receiving the PTT communication established message, the PTT communication permission establishment message or the paging message by the terminal. After that, it can determine whether it is located in the predefined area of the group, and perform different operations according to the determined situation, such as sending a paging response to the server or not sending a paging response, sending the server to the predefined area or leaving the predefined The message of the area, thereby implementing the predefined area function of the PTT communication; all the interactions between the server and the terminal are performed through the existing wireless IP network, and all the interaction information is user plane information for the communication network, and does not involve Communication network control plane signaling, therefore, the method of this embodiment can not change existing wireless
IP网络而实现 PTT通信的预定义区域功能, 降低了实现成本。 The IP network realizes the predefined area function of PTT communication, which reduces the implementation cost.
图 3为本发明 PTT通信方法实施例三的流程图, 本实施例的执行主体为 发送 PTT通信建立请求的终端。 如图 3所示, 本实施例的方法可以包括: 步骤 301、 终端向服务器发送 PTT通信建立请求, 所述 PTT通信建立请 求中携带群组标识和所述终端当前所在小区的小区标识。  FIG. 3 is a flowchart of Embodiment 3 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention. The execution body of this embodiment is a terminal that sends a PTT communication setup request. As shown in FIG. 3, the method in this embodiment may include: Step 301: A terminal sends a PTT communication setup request to a server, where the PTT communication setup request carries a group identifier and a cell identifier of a cell where the terminal is currently located.
具体地, 服务器可以通过群组标识查询该群组的预定义区域, 从而可以 判断该终端当前是否位于该群组的预定义区域之内。  Specifically, the server may query the predefined area of the group by using the group identifier, so that it may be determined whether the terminal is currently located in a predefined area of the group.
步骤 302、 接收所述服务器发送的 PTT通信建立响应, 所述 PTT通信建 立响应是所述服务器根据所述群组标识对应的群组的预定义区域信息和所述 终端当前所在小区的小区标识, 判断所述终端是否位于所述群组的预定义区 域内并根据判断结果发送的。  Step 302: Receive a PTT communication establishment response sent by the server, where the PTT communication establishment response is a predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier and a cell identifier of a current cell of the terminal, Determining whether the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group and transmitting according to the judgment result.
步骤 303、 根据所述 PPT通信建立响应, 确定是否加入所述群组的 PPT 通信。  Step 303: Determine, according to the PPT communication establishment response, whether to join the PPT communication of the group.
具体地,当所述终端所接收的 PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信已建立消 息或 PTT通信允许建立消息, 则确定加入所述群组的 PTT通信; 当所述终端 接收的 PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信建立失败的消息,则确定不能加入所 述群组的 PTT通信。  Specifically, when the PTT communication setup response received by the terminal includes a PTT communication established message or a PTT communication permission establishment message, determining to join the PTT communication of the group; when the PTT communication establishment response received by the terminal includes a PTT If the communication establishment fails, it is determined that the PTT communication of the group cannot be joined.
本实施例, 通过终端向服务器发送的 PTT通信建立请求中携带群组标识 和该终端的当前小区标识, 使服务器能够根据群组标识查询该群组的预定义 区域信息, 从而判断该终端是否位于该群组的预定义区域之内, 并接收服务 器根据判断结果向该终端发送的不同的 PTT通信建立响应,实现 PTT通信建 立阶段的预定义区域功能; 上述服务器与终端所有交互均是通过现有的无线 IP网络进行的, 所有的交互信息对于通信网络来说均是用户面的信息, 不涉 及通信网络控制面信令, 因此, 本实施例的方法可以不改变现有的无线 IP网 络而实现 PTT通信的预定义区域功能, 降低了实现成本。 In this embodiment, the PTT communication setup request sent by the terminal to the server carries the group identifier and the current cell identifier of the terminal, so that the server can query the predefined area information of the group according to the group identifier, thereby determining whether the terminal is located. Within a predefined area of the group, and receiving a different PTT communication setup response sent by the server to the terminal according to the judgment result, implementing a predefined area function in the PTT communication establishment phase; all interactions between the server and the terminal are through existing Wireless All the interaction information performed by the IP network is user plane information for the communication network, and does not involve communication network control plane signaling. Therefore, the method of this embodiment can implement PTT communication without changing the existing wireless IP network. The predefined zone features reduce implementation costs.
图 4为本发明 PTT通信方法实施例四的流程图, 本实施例的执行主体为 发送 PTT通信建立请求的终端。 如图 4所示, 本实施例的方法可以包括: 步骤 401、 终端向服务器发送 PTT通信建立请求, 所述 PTT通信建立请 求中携带群组标识和所述终端当前所在小区的小区标识。  4 is a flowchart of Embodiment 4 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention. The execution subject of this embodiment is a terminal that sends a PTT communication establishment request. As shown in FIG. 4, the method in this embodiment may include: Step 401: A terminal sends a PTT communication setup request to a server, where the PTT communication setup request carries a group identifier and a cell identifier of a cell where the terminal is currently located.
如果该终端当前位于该群组的预定义区域之外, 则接收的所述服务器发 送的 PTT通信建立响应, 包括 PTT通信建立失败的消息, 该消息是所述服务 器在判断所述终端位于所述群组标识对应的群组对应的预定义区域之外时发 送的。  If the terminal is currently located outside the predefined area of the group, the received PTT communication establishment response sent by the server includes a message that the PTT communication establishment fails, and the message is that the server determines that the terminal is located in the Sent when the group ID corresponds to the group corresponding to the predefined area.
步骤 402、 接收所述服务器发送的 PTT通信建立响应, 所述 PTT通信建 立响应中携带所述群组标识和所述群组标识对应的群组的预定义区域信息, 所述 PTT通信建立响应是所述服务器根据所述群组标识对应的群组的预定义 区域信息和所述终端当前所在小区的小区标识, 判断所述终端位于所述群组 的预定义区域之内后发送的。  Step 402: Receive a PTT communication setup response sent by the server, where the PTT communication setup response carries the predefined identifier information of the group identifier and the group corresponding to the group identifier, where the PTT communication establishment response is The server sends, according to the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier and the cell identifier of the cell where the terminal is currently located, after determining that the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group.
具体地, PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信已建立消息和 PTT通信允许建 立消息。如果该终端想要建立 PTT通信的群组当前正在进行 PTT通信, 则服 务器发送的 PTT通信建立响应为 PTT通信已建立消息,此时该终端可以直接 加入该群组的 PTT通信; 如果该终端想要建立 PTT通信的群组的 PTT通信 未建立, 则服务器发送的 PTT通信建立响应为 PTT通信允许建立消息。  Specifically, the PTT communication setup response includes a PTT communication established message and PTT communication allows the establishment of a message. If the group that the terminal wants to establish PTT communication is currently performing PTT communication, the PTT communication establishment response sent by the server is a PTT communication established message, and the terminal can directly join the PTT communication of the group; if the terminal wants The PTT communication establishment of the group to establish the PTT communication is not established, and the PTT communication establishment response sent by the server is a PTT communication permission establishment message.
步骤 403、根据所述 PPT通信建立响应,确定加入所述群组的 PPT通信。 步骤 404、 保存所述群组的预定义区域信息。  Step 403: Determine, according to the PPT communication establishment response, a PPT communication that joins the group. Step 404: Save predefined area information of the group.
步骤 405、 当所述终端移动时, 根据保存的预定义区域信息和所述终端 移动至小区的小区标识判断所述终端是否离开所述群组的预定义区域。  Step 405: When the terminal moves, determine, according to the saved predefined area information and the cell identity that the terminal moves to the cell, whether the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group.
步骤 406、 当判断结果为是时, 向所述服务器发送离开预定义区域的消 息, 所述离开预定义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识和群组标识, 以 使所述服务器将所述终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。  Step 406: When the determination result is yes, send a message to the server to leave the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier and the group identifier of the terminal, so that the server will The terminal moves out of the PTT communication of the group.
所述终端离开所述群组的预定义区域, 具体为, 所述终端所处的小区发 生变化, 原小区位于所述群组的预定义区域之内, 而当前小区位于所述群组 的预定义区域之外。 The terminal leaves the predefined area of the group, specifically, the cell where the terminal is located changes, the original cell is located in a predefined area of the group, and the current cell is located in the group. Outside of the predefined area.
步骤 407、 当所述终端再次移动时, 根据保存的预定义区域信息和所述 终端移动至小区的小区标识判断所述终端是否进入所述群组的预定义区域。  Step 407: When the terminal moves again, determine, according to the saved predefined area information and the cell identifier that the terminal moves to the cell, whether the terminal enters a predefined area of the group.
步骤 408、 当判断结果为是时, 向所述服务器发送进入预定义区域的消 息, 所述进入预定义区域的消息中携带终端标识和群组标识, 以使所述服务 器将所述终端加入所述群组的 PTT通信。  Step 408: When the determination result is yes, send a message to the server to enter a predefined area, where the message entering the predefined area carries a terminal identifier and a group identifier, so that the server joins the terminal The group's PTT communication.
步骤 407、 408的场景为: 该终端移动至该群组的预定义区域之外后又移 动回到该群组的预定义区域之内, 此时, 向服务器发送进入预定义区域的消 息。  The scenario of steps 407 and 408 is: the terminal moves outside the predefined area of the group and then moves back to the predefined area of the group. At this time, the message to enter the predefined area is sent to the server.
步骤 409、 接收所述服务器发送的呼叫结束消息, 所述呼叫结束消息中 携带所述群组的群组标识。  Step 409: Receive a call end message sent by the server, where the call end message carries a group identifier of the group.
所述呼叫结束消息是所述服务器在收到所述群组的任意一个正在进行 PTT通信的终端发送的呼叫结束请求之后发送的。  The call end message is sent by the server after receiving a call end request sent by any terminal of the group that is performing PTT communication.
步骤 410、 删除本地保存的所述群组的预定义区域信息。  Step 410: Delete pre-defined area information of the group saved locally.
步骤 410的目的是, 在该群组的 PTT通信结束之后, 使终端在此进入或 离开该群组的预定义区域时, 不再向服务器发送进入预定义区域或离开预定 义区域的消息。  The purpose of step 410 is to stop the terminal from entering the predefined area or leaving the predefined area when the terminal enters or leaves the predefined area of the group after the PTT communication of the group ends.
本实施例, 终端通过接收服务器发送的 PTT通信建立响应中携带的群组 的预定义区域信息, 并使用该预定义区域信息判断自身移动时判断当前是否 位于该群组的预定义区域之内, 从而根据判断的情况向服务器发送离开预定 义区域或进入预定义区域的消息, 使服务器将该终端移出或加入该群组的 PTT通信, 从而实现 PTT通信的预定义区域功能; 上述服务器与终端所有交 互均是通过现有的无线 IP网络进行的, 所有的交互信息对于通信网络来说均 是用户面的信息, 不涉及通信网络控制面信令, 因此, 本实施例的方法可以 不改变现有的无线 IP网络而实现 PTT通信的预定义区域功能,降低了实现成 本。  In this embodiment, the terminal establishes the predefined area information of the group carried in the response by using the PTT communication sent by the receiving server, and uses the predefined area information to determine whether it is currently located in the predefined area of the group when moving. Therefore, according to the determined situation, the server sends a message leaving the predefined area or entering the predefined area, so that the server moves the terminal out or joins the PTT communication of the group, thereby implementing a predefined area function of the PTT communication; The interaction is performed through the existing wireless IP network. All the interaction information is the user plane information for the communication network, and does not involve the communication network control plane signaling. Therefore, the method of this embodiment may not change the existing The wireless IP network realizes the predefined area function of PTT communication, which reduces the implementation cost.
图 5为本发明 PTT通信方法实施例五的流程图, 本实施例的执行主体为 服务器。 如图 5所示, 本实施例的方法可以包括:  FIG. 5 is a flowchart of Embodiment 5 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention. The execution body of this embodiment is a server. As shown in FIG. 5, the method in this embodiment may include:
步骤 501、 服务器确定允许建立群组的 PTT通信。  Step 501: The server determines to allow PTT communication of the group to be established.
具体场景为, 例如, 服务器接收该群组的一个终端发送的 PTT通信建立 请求, 且经过判断该终端处于该群组的预定义区域之内, 这时服务器确定允 许建立群组的 PTT通信。 The specific scenario is, for example, the server receives the establishment of the PTT communication sent by one terminal of the group. The request, and after determining that the terminal is within a predefined area of the group, then the server determines to allow establishment of the group's PTT communication.
步骤 502、 向所述群组的终端发送所述群组的 PTT通信的寻呼消息, 所 述寻呼消息中携带所述群组的群组标识和所述群组的预定义区域信息。  Step 502: Send a paging message of the PTT communication of the group to the terminal of the group, where the paging message carries a group identifier of the group and predefined area information of the group.
具体地, 服务器发送寻呼消息的目标对象可以为该群组中除了发送的 Specifically, the target object that the server sends the paging message may be sent in the group except
PTT通信建立请求的终端之外的其它终端。 The PTT communicates with other terminals than the requesting terminal.
寻呼消息中携带所述群组的群组标识和所述群组的预定义区域信息, 是 为了使接收寻呼消息的终端可以根据所述群组的预定义区域信息, 自行判断 自身是否位于该群组的预定义区域之内。  The paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group, so that the terminal receiving the paging message can determine whether it is located according to the predefined area information of the group. Within the predefined area of the group.
本实施例, 通过服务器在向终端发送的寻呼消息中携带该群组的群组标 识和预定义区域信息,以使终端能够自行判断自身是否位于预定义区域之内, 从而使终端能够根据判断的情况执行不同的操作, 例如返回寻呼响应或不返 回寻呼响应, 以及在后续的 PTT通信过程中发送进入或离开所述群组的预定 义区域的消息, 从而实现 PTT通信的预定义区域功能; 由于以上实现预定义 区域功能的过程中,服务器与终端的信息交互可以通过现有的无线 IP网络实 现, 而所交互的信息对于无线 IP网络来说均是用户面的信息, 与无线 IP网 络本身不需要交互, 也不涉及通信网络中控制面信令; 也就是说, 本实施例 的方法, 只需要提供支持该方法的服务器和支持该方法的终端, 该服务器和 该终端可以通过现有的任意一个无线 IP网络进行通信, 并不需要改变现有通 信网络中的任何网元, 从而实现了在现有移动网络的基础上使 PTT通信具有 预定义区域的功能, 降低了预定义区域的 PTT通信的实现成本。  In this embodiment, the server carries the group identifier and the predefined area information of the group in the paging message sent by the server, so that the terminal can determine whether it is located in the predefined area, so that the terminal can judge according to the judgment. The case performs different operations, such as returning a page response or not returning a page response, and transmitting a message entering or leaving a predefined area of the group during subsequent PTT communication, thereby implementing a predefined area of PTT communication. Function; Because the above implementation of the predefined area function, the information interaction between the server and the terminal can be realized through the existing wireless IP network, and the information exchanged is the user plane information for the wireless IP network, and the wireless IP The network itself does not need to interact, nor does it involve control plane signaling in the communication network; that is, the method of this embodiment only needs to provide a server supporting the method and a terminal supporting the method, and the server and the terminal can pass the present Any wireless IP network can communicate without changing the existing one. Any communication network NE, thereby realizing the PTT communication based on the existing mobile network having a predefined area functions to reduce the implementation cost of a predefined PTT communication area.
图 6为本发明 PTT通信方法实施例六的流程图, 本实施例的执行主体为 服务器。 如图 6所示, 本实施例的方法可以包括:  FIG. 6 is a flowchart of Embodiment 6 of the PTT communication method according to the present invention. The execution body of this embodiment is a server. As shown in FIG. 6, the method in this embodiment may include:
步骤 601、 服务器确定允许建立群组的 PTT通信。  Step 601: The server determines to allow PTT communication of the group to be established.
步骤 602、 向所述群组的终端发送所述群组的 PTT通信的寻呼消息, 所 述寻呼消息中携带所述群组的群组标识和所述群组的预定义区域信息。  Step 602: Send, to the terminal of the group, a paging message of the PTT communication of the group, where the paging message carries a group identifier of the group and predefined area information of the group.
步骤 603、 接收所述群组的终端发送的寻呼响应消息, 所述寻呼响应消 息中携带所述群组的群组标识, 所述寻呼响应消息是所述终端在根据自身当 前小区的小区标识判断当前处于所述预定义区域之内后发送的。  Step 603: Receive a paging response message sent by the terminal of the group, where the paging response message carries a group identifier of the group, where the paging response message is that the terminal is according to its current current cell. The cell identifier is sent after being judged to be currently within the predefined area.
而如果接收寻呼消息的终端判断出自身当前处于所述群组的预定义区域 之外, 则不向所述服务器发送寻呼响应消息; 而当该终端移动后进入所述群 组的预定义区域之内时, 将向所述服务器发送进入预定义区域的消息, 不需 要再发寻呼响应消息。 And if the terminal receiving the paging message determines that it is currently in a predefined area of the group In addition, the paging response message is not sent to the server; when the terminal moves into the predefined area of the group, the server will send a message to the predefined area, which does not need to be Send a page response message.
步骤 604、 接收所述群组的终端发送的离开预定义区域的消息, 所述离 开预定义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识。  Step 604: Receive a message that is sent by the terminal of the group to leave a predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group.
步骤 605、 将所述终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。  Step 605: Move the terminal out of the PTT communication of the group.
步骤 604、 605为一组可选步骤, 其具体场景为: 该群组中正在进行 PTT 通信的终端的当前小区发生变化, 当该终端判断出当前移动至该群组的预定 义区域之外时, 将向服务器发送离开预定义区域的消息, 这时, 服务器执行 步骤 604、 605。  Steps 604 and 605 are a set of optional steps. The specific scenario is: the current cell of the terminal in the group that is undergoing PTT communication changes, when the terminal determines that the current location is outside the predefined area of the group. The message leaving the predefined area will be sent to the server, at which point the server performs steps 604, 605.
步骤 605 中, 服务器还要判断该终端是否为主讲终端: 如果该终端为非 主讲终端, 则停止向该终端发送主讲终端的媒体流; 如果该终端为主讲终端, 则译放其话权, 并将该群组的 "是否有讲者 "的状态更新为"否", 以使该群组 正在进行 PTT通信的其它终端可以申请话权。  In step 605, the server further determines whether the terminal is the main terminal: if the terminal is a non-talking terminal, stopping sending the media stream of the calling terminal to the terminal; if the terminal is the main terminal, translating the right to speak, and The status of "whether or not there is a speaker" of the group is updated to "No", so that other terminals in the group that are performing PTT communication can apply for the right to speak.
步骤 606、 接收所述群组的终端发送的进入预定义区域的消息, 所述进 入预定义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识。  Step 606: Receive a message that is sent by the terminal of the group to enter a predefined area, where the message that enters the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group.
步骤 607、 将所述终端加入所述群组的 PTT通信。  Step 607: Add the terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
步骤 606、 607为一组可选步骤, 其具体场景为: 该群组的某个终端的当 前小区发生变化, 例如终端移动至该群组的预定义区域之外, 服务器执行了 步骤 604、 605之后, 该终端继续移动, 又移动回到该群组的预定义区域之内 时, 将向服务器发送进入预定义区域的消息, 这时, 服务器执行步骤 606、 607; 或者, 在服务器执行步骤 603时, 该群组中的某个终端位于该群组的预 定义区域之外, 而当前时刻该终端移动进入该群组的预定义区域, 该终端将 向服务器发送进入预定义区域的消息, 这时服务器执行步骤 606、 607。  Steps 606 and 607 are a set of optional steps, where the specific scenario is: the current cell of a certain terminal of the group changes, for example, the terminal moves to a predefined area of the group, and the server performs steps 604 and 605. After the terminal continues to move and moves back to the predefined area of the group, a message to enter the predefined area will be sent to the server. At this time, the server performs steps 606, 607; or, the server performs step 603. When a terminal in the group is outside the predefined area of the group, and the terminal moves to a predefined area of the group at the current moment, the terminal sends a message to the server to enter the predefined area, which The server then performs steps 606, 607.
步骤 607中, 具体地, 服务器向该终端发送主讲终端的媒体流。  In step 607, specifically, the server sends the media stream of the host terminal to the terminal.
步骤 608、 接收所述群组的终端发送的呼叫结束请求。  Step 608: Receive a call end request sent by the terminal of the group.
步骤 609、 向所述群组的所有终端发送呼叫结束消息, 以使所述群组的 所有终端删除所述群组的预定义区域信息。  Step 609: Send a call end message to all terminals of the group, so that all terminals of the group delete the predefined area information of the group.
具体地 , 正在进行 PTT通信的任意一个终端均可以向服务器发送呼叫结 束请求, 服务器在收到呼叫结束请求后向该群组所有已注册的终端发送呼叫 结束消息, 以使所述终端删除所述群组的预定义区域信息。 Specifically, any terminal that is performing PTT communication may send a call end request to the server, and the server sends a call to all registered terminals of the group after receiving the call end request. Ending the message, so that the terminal deletes the predefined area information of the group.
本实施例, 通过服务器将群组的预定义区域信息发送给该群组的终端, 实现由终端在接收寻呼消息后、 终端的当前小区发生变化后能够判断自身是 否位于该群组预定义区域之内, 并根据判断的情况执行不同的操作, 如向服 务器发送寻呼响应或不发送寻呼响应, 向服务器发送进入预定义区域或离开 预定义区域的消息, 从而实现 PTT通信的预定义区域功能; 上述服务器与终 端所有交互均是通过现有的无线 IP网络进行的, 所有的交互信息对于通信网 络来说均是用户面的信息, 不涉及通信网络控制面信令, 因此, 本实施例的 方法可以不改变现有的无线 IP网络而实现 PTT通信的预定义区域功能,降低 了实现成本。  In this embodiment, the pre-defined area information of the group is sent to the terminal of the group by the server, so that after the terminal receives the paging message and the current cell of the terminal changes, it can determine whether it is located in the predefined area of the group. And performing different operations according to the determined situation, such as sending a paging response to the server or not sending a paging response, sending a message to the server to enter a predefined area or leaving the predefined area, thereby implementing a predefined area of PTT communication. The above-mentioned interaction between the server and the terminal is performed through the existing wireless IP network, and all the interaction information is user plane information for the communication network, and does not involve communication network control plane signaling. Therefore, this embodiment The method can realize the predefined area function of PTT communication without changing the existing wireless IP network, and the implementation cost is reduced.
图 7为本发明 PTT通信方法实施例七的流程图, 本实施例的执行主体为 接收寻呼消息的终端。 如图 7所示, 本实施例的方法可以包括:  FIG. 7 is a flowchart of Embodiment 7 of a PTT communication method according to the present invention. The execution subject of this embodiment is a terminal that receives a paging message. As shown in FIG. 7, the method in this embodiment may include:
步骤 701、 终端接收服务器发送的群组的 PTT通信的寻呼消息, 所述寻 呼消息中携带所述群组的群组标识和所述群组的预定义区域信息。  Step 701: The terminal receives a paging message of the PTT communication of the group sent by the server, where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group.
在步骤 701之前, 该群组中有终端向服务器发送了 PTT通信建立请求, 且服务器向该发送请求的终端发送了 PTT通信允许建立消息, 这时, 该群组 的所有已注册的其它终端将接收服务器发送的该群组 PTT通信的寻呼消息。  Before step 701, a terminal in the group sends a PTT communication establishment request to the server, and the server sends a PTT communication permission establishment message to the terminal that sends the request, at this time, all the registered other terminals of the group will Receiving a paging message of the group PTT communication sent by the server.
如果终端未注册, 则服务器无法通过无线 IP网络与其通信, 因此, 服务 器不会向未注册的终端发送寻呼消息。 而如果该终端在该群组的 PTT通信建 立之后注册了, 服务器将向其补发寻呼消息。  If the terminal is not registered, the server cannot communicate with it over the wireless IP network, so the server does not send a paging message to the unregistered terminal. And if the terminal is registered after the group's PTT communication is established, the server will resend the paging message to it.
步骤 702、 对应所述群组标识, 保存所述群组的预定义区域信息。  Step 702: Save the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier.
终端接收 PTT通信的寻呼消息后, 将该寻呼消息中携带的群组标识和该 群组的预定义区域信息保存在本地, 以使该终端在该次 PTT通信过程中, 能 够根据该群组的预定义区域信息执行不同的操作, 例如向服务器返回或不返 回寻呼响应消息、 向服务器发送离开预定义区域的消息或进入预定义区域的 消息。  After receiving the paging message of the PTT communication, the terminal saves the group identifier carried in the paging message and the predefined area information of the group locally, so that the terminal can be based on the group during the PTT communication process. The predefined area information of the group performs different operations, such as returning or not returning a page response message to the server, sending a message leaving the predefined area to the server, or entering a message of a predefined area.
本实施例, 通过终端接收服务器发送的群组的 PTT通信寻呼消息中携带 群组标识和预定义区域信息, 使终端能够判断自身当前是否位于该群组的预 定义区域之内, 以根据判断结果决定是否向服务器发送寻呼响应消息, 从而 实现 PTT通信的预定义区域功能; 上述服务器与终端所有交互均是通过现有 的无线 IP网络进行的,所有的交互信息对于通信网络来说均是用户面的信息, 不涉及通信网络控制面信令, 因此, 本实施例的方法可以不改变现有的无线In this embodiment, the PTT communication paging message of the group sent by the terminal receiving server carries the group identifier and the predefined area information, so that the terminal can determine whether it is currently located in the predefined area of the group, according to the judgment. The result determines whether to send a paging response message to the server, thereby implementing a predefined area function of the PTT communication; all interactions between the server and the terminal are through existing The wireless IP network performs all the information about the user plane for the communication network, and does not involve the communication network control plane signaling. Therefore, the method of this embodiment does not change the existing wireless.
IP网络而实现 PTT通信的预定义区域功能, 降低了实现成本。 The IP network realizes the predefined area function of PTT communication, which reduces the implementation cost.
图 8为本发明 PTT通信方法实施例八的流程图, 本实施例的执行主体为 接收寻呼消息的终端。 如图 8所示, 本实施例的方法可以包括:  FIG. 8 is a flowchart of Embodiment 8 of the PTT communication method according to the present invention. The executor of this embodiment is a terminal that receives a paging message. As shown in FIG. 8, the method in this embodiment may include:
步骤 801、 终端接收服务器发送的群组的 PTT通信的寻呼消息, 所述寻 呼消息中携带所述群组的群组标识和所述群组的预定义区域信息。  Step 801: The terminal receives a paging message of the PTT communication of the group sent by the server, where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group.
步骤 802、 对应所述群组标识, 保存所述群组的预定义区域信息。  Step 802: Correspond to the group identifier, and save predefined area information of the group.
步骤 803、 根据自身当前所在小区的小区标识和所述预定义区域信息判 断当前是否位于所述群组的预定义区域之内。  Step 803: Determine, according to the cell identifier of the cell in which the current cell is located, and the predefined area information, whether the current location is within the predefined area of the group.
具体地, 终端将当前所在小区的小区标识与属于该群组的预定义区域的 小区标识进行对比, 以判断当前是否位于该群组的预定义区域之内。  Specifically, the terminal compares the cell identifier of the current cell with the cell identifier of the predefined area belonging to the group to determine whether it is currently located in a predefined area of the group.
步骤 804、 如果所述终端当前位于所述群组的预定义区域之内, 则向所 述服务器发送寻呼响应消息,所述寻呼响应消息中携带所述群组的群组标识。  Step 804: If the terminal is currently located in a predefined area of the group, send a paging response message to the server, where the paging response message carries the group identifier of the group.
该群组中至少一个终端向服务器发送寻呼响应消息之后, 该群组的 PTT 通信即可成功建立, 这时, 如果群组中有终端申请了话权成为主讲终端, 其 它的终端即可接收到主讲终端的媒体流。  After at least one terminal in the group sends a paging response message to the server, the PTT communication of the group can be successfully established. At this time, if a terminal in the group applies for the right to become the terminal, other terminals can receive. The media stream to the terminal.
步骤 805、 如果所述终端当前位于所述群组的预定义区域之外, 且所述 终端移动之后, 根据保存的预定义区域信息和所述终端移动至小区的小区标 识确定所述终端是否进入所述群组的预定义区域。  Step 805: If the terminal is currently located outside the predefined area of the group, and after the terminal moves, determine whether the terminal enters according to the saved predefined area information and the cell identity of the terminal moving to the cell. A predefined area of the group.
步骤 806、 当所述终端进入所述群组的预定义区域之内时, 向所述服务 器发送进入预定义区域的消息, 所述进入预定义区域的消息中携带所述终端 的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识, 以使所述服务器将所述终端加入所述群 组的 PTT通信。  Step 806: When the terminal enters a predefined area of the group, send a message to the server to enter a predefined area, where the message entering the predefined area carries the terminal identifier and the location of the terminal The group identity of the group is such that the server joins the terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
步骤 807、 当所述终端移动时, 根据保存的预定义区域信息和所述终端 移动至小区的小区标识确定所述终端是否离开所述群组的预定义区域。  Step 807: When the terminal moves, determining, according to the saved predefined area information and the cell identifier of the terminal moving to the cell, whether the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group.
步骤 808、 当所述终端离开所述群组的预定义区域时, 向所述服务器发 送离开预定义区域的消息, 所述离开预定义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终 端标识和所述群组的群组标识, 以使所述服务器将所述终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。 步骤 807、 808的具体场景为: 终端在进行该群组的 PTT通信的过程中 移动至该群组的预定义区域之外, 此时, 该终端向服务器发送离开预定义区 域的消息。 Step 808: When the terminal leaves the predefined area of the group, send a message to the server to leave the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group A group identity of the group such that the server moves the terminal out of the PTT communication of the group. The specific scenarios of the steps 807 and 808 are as follows: The terminal moves to the outside of the predefined area of the group during the PTT communication of the group. At this time, the terminal sends a message to the server to leave the predefined area.
步骤 809、 接收所述服务器发送的呼叫结束消息, 所述呼叫结束消息中 携带所述群组的群组标识。  Step 809: Receive a call end message sent by the server, where the call end message carries a group identifier of the group.
具体地, 所述呼叫结束消息是所述服务器在收到所述群组的任意一个正 在进行 PTT通信的终端发送的呼叫结束请求之后发送的。  Specifically, the call end message is sent by the server after receiving a call end request sent by any terminal of the group that is performing PTT communication.
步骤 810、 删除本地保存的所述群组的预定义区域信息。  Step 810: Delete pre-defined area information of the group that is saved locally.
步骤 810的目的是, 在该群组的 PTT通信结束之后, 使终端在此进入或 离开该群组的预定义区域时, 不再向服务器发送进入预定义区域或离开预定 义区域的消息。  The purpose of step 810 is to stop the terminal from entering the predefined area or leaving the predefined area when the terminal enters or leaves the predefined area of the group after the PTT communication of the group ends.
本实施例, 终端通过接收服务器发送的群组 PTT通信寻呼消息中携带的 群组的预定义区域信息, 并且在 PTT通信过程中能够在当前小区发生变化时 判断自身是否位于预定义区域之内, 从而能够根据判断的情况执行不同的操 作, 具体地, 终端能够使用该预定义区域信息在自身移动时判断当前是否位 于该群组的预定义区域之内, 从而根据判断的情况向服务器发送离开预定义 区域或进入预定义区域的消息, 使服务器将该终端移出或加入该群组的 PTT 通信, 从而实现 PTT通信的预定义区域功能; 上述服务器与终端所有交互均 是通过现有的无线 IP网络进行的, 所有的交互信息对于通信网络来说均是用 户面的信息, 不涉及通信网络控制面信令, 因此, 本实施例的方法可以不改 变现有的无线 IP网络而实现 PTT通信的预定义区域功能, 降低了实现成本。  In this embodiment, the terminal receives the predefined area information of the group carried in the group PTT communication paging message sent by the server, and can determine whether the current cell is located in the predefined area when the current cell changes during the PTT communication process. Therefore, different operations can be performed according to the determined situation. Specifically, the terminal can use the predefined area information to determine whether it is currently located in a predefined area of the group when it moves, thereby sending a message to the server according to the determined situation. A predefined area or a message entering a predefined area, causing the server to move the terminal out or join the PTT communication of the group, thereby implementing a predefined area function of the PTT communication; all interactions between the server and the terminal are through the existing wireless IP All the interaction information performed by the network is user plane information for the communication network, and does not involve communication network control plane signaling. Therefore, the method of this embodiment can implement PTT communication without changing the existing wireless IP network. Predefined zone features reduce implementation costs.
图 9为本发明 PTT通信方法实施例九的信令流程图, 为了便于描述, 本 发明实施例将发送 PTT建立请求的终端命名为发起终端, 将接收寻呼消息的 其它终端命名为寻呼终端。 其中, 寻呼终端的个数可以为多个, 本发明实施 例以一个为例进行介绍。 如图 9所示, 本实施例的方法可以包括:  FIG. 9 is a signaling flowchart of a ninth embodiment of a PTT communication method according to the present invention. For convenience of description, the embodiment of the present invention names a terminal that sends a PTT establishment request as an initiating terminal, and names another terminal that receives the paging message as a paging terminal. . The number of the paging terminals may be multiple. The embodiment of the present invention is described by taking one example as an example. As shown in FIG. 9, the method in this embodiment may include:
步骤 901、 发起终端向服务器发送 PTT通信建立请求, 所述 PTT通信建 立请求中携带群组标识和终端当前所在小区的小区标识。  Step 901: The initiating terminal sends a PTT communication establishment request to the server, where the PTT communication establishment request carries the group identifier and the cell identifier of the cell where the terminal is currently located.
步骤 902、 服务器根据所述群组标识, 查询所述群组标识对应的群组的 预定义区域信息。  Step 902: The server queries, according to the group identifier, predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier.
步骤 903、 服务器判断所述发起终端是否位于所述群组的预定义区域之 内。 Step 903: The server determines whether the initiating terminal is located in a predefined area of the group. Inside.
步骤 904、 如果所述发起终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之外, 则服务 器向所述发起终端发送包括 PTT通信建立失败消息的 PTT通信建立响应。  Step 904: If the originating terminal is located outside a predefined area of the group, the server sends a PTT communication setup response including a PTT communication setup failure message to the initiating terminal.
步骤 905、 如果所述发起终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之内, 则服务 器向所述发起终端发送包括 PTT通信允许建立的 PTT通信建立响应, 所述 PTT通信建立响应中携带所述群组的群组标识、所述群组的预定义区域信息。  Step 905: If the originating terminal is located in a predefined area of the group, the server sends a PTT communication setup response including the PTT communication permission establishment to the initiating terminal, where the PTT communication setup response carries the group Group ID of the group, predefined area information of the group.
具体地, 服务器判断所述发起终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之内, 且 所述群组的 PPT通信未建立时,向所述发起终端发送包括 PTT通信允许建立 的 PTT通信建立响应。  Specifically, the server determines that the initiating terminal is located in a predefined area of the group, and when the PPT communication of the group is not established, sends a PTT communication setup response including the PTT communication permission establishment to the initiating terminal.
步骤 906、 服务器向所述群组的其它终端发送寻呼消息, 所述寻呼消息 中携带所述群组的群组标识和所述群组的预定义区域信息。  Step 906: The server sends a paging message to the other terminals of the group, where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group.
需要说明的是, 步骤 905之后执行步骤 906, 步骤 904之后流程结束。 步骤 907、 寻呼终端根据当前所在小区的小区标识判断自身当前是否位 于所述群组的预定义区域之内。  It should be noted that after step 905, step 906 is performed, and after step 904, the process ends. Step 907: The paging terminal determines, according to the cell identity of the current cell, whether it is currently located in a predefined area of the group.
步骤 908、 如果所述寻呼终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之内, 则向服 务器发送寻呼响应消息, 所述寻呼响应消息中携带所述群组的群组标识。  Step 908: If the paging terminal is located in a predefined area of the group, send a paging response message to the server, where the paging response message carries the group identifier of the group.
步骤 909、 如果所述寻呼终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之外, 当所述 寻呼终端移动至所述群组的预定义区域之内, 则向所述服务器发送进入预定 义区域的消息, 所述进入预定义区域的消息中携带所述寻呼终端的终端标识 和所述群组的群组标识。  Step 909: If the paging terminal is located outside a predefined area of the group, when the paging terminal moves into a predefined area of the group, send the predefined area to the server. The message that enters the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the paging terminal and the group identifier of the group.
步骤 910、 服务器将所述寻呼终端加入所述群组的 PTT通信。  Step 910: The server adds the paging terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
步骤 911、 如果所述寻呼终端再次移动, 当移动至所述群组的预定义区 域之外时, 向所述服务器发送离开预定义区域的消息, 所述离开预定义区域 的消息中携带所述寻呼终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识。  Step 911: If the paging terminal moves again, when moving to a predefined area of the group, sending a message leaving the predefined area to the server, where the message leaving the predefined area carries The terminal identifier of the paging terminal and the group identifier of the group.
步骤 912、 服务器将所述寻呼终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。  Step 912: The server moves the paging terminal out of the PTT communication of the group.
步骤 913、 如果发起终端移动至所述群组的预定义区域之外, 则向所述 服务器发送离开预定义区域的消息, 所述离开预定义区域的消息中携带所述 发起终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识。  Step 913: If the initiating terminal moves outside the predefined area of the group, send a message to the server to leave the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the initiating terminal and The group identifier of the group.
步骤 914、 服务器将所述发起终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。  Step 914: The server moves the initiating terminal out of the PTT communication of the group.
步骤 915、 如果所述发起终端再次移动, 当移动至所述群组的预定义区 域之内, 则向所述服务器发送进入预定义区域的消息, 所述进入预定义区域 的消息中携带所述发起终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识。 Step 915: If the initiating terminal moves again, when moving to a predefined area of the group The message is sent to the server to enter the predefined area, and the message that enters the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the originating terminal and the group identifier of the group.
步骤 916、 服务器将所述发起终端加入所述群组的 PTT通信。  Step 916: The server joins the initiating terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
步骤 917、 任意一个正在进行 PTT通信的终端向所述服务器发送呼叫结 束请求。  Step 917: Any terminal that is performing PTT communication sends a call end request to the server.
步骤 918、 向所有已注册的终端发送呼叫结束消息。  Step 918: Send a call end message to all registered terminals.
步骤 919、 所有已注册的终端删除本地保存的所述群组的预定义区域信 息。  Step 919: All registered terminals delete the locally reserved predefined area information of the group.
本实施例, 通过在 PTT通信建立时服务器将群组的预定义区域信息发送 给该群组的所有已注册的终端, 使终端能够判断自身当前是否位于预定该群 组的预定义区域之内, 从而实现只有在预定义区域之内才能进行 PTT通信的 功能;上述服务器与终端所有交互均是通过现有的无线 IP网络进行的,所有的 交互信息对于通信网络来说均是用户面的信息,不涉及通信网络控制面信令, 因此,本实施例的方法可以不改变现有的无线 IP网络而实现 PTT通信的预定 义区域功能, 降低了实现成本。  In this embodiment, the server can send the pre-defined area information of the group to all the registered terminals of the group when the PTT communication is established, so that the terminal can determine whether it is currently located in a predefined area of the group. Therefore, the function of PTT communication can be performed only within a predefined area; all interactions between the server and the terminal are performed through an existing wireless IP network, and all interaction information is user plane information for the communication network. The communication network control plane signaling is not involved. Therefore, the method in this embodiment can implement the predefined area function of the PTT communication without changing the existing wireless IP network, thereby reducing the implementation cost.
图 10为本发明服务器实施例一的结构示意图, 如图 10所示, 本实施例 的服务器 1000可以包括: 接收模块 11、 查询模块 12、 判断模块 13和发送模 块 14。 其中, 接收模块 11 , 用于接收终端发送的 PTT通信建立请求, 所述 PTT通信建立请求中携带群组标识和所述终端当前所在小区的小区标识; 查 询模块 12, 用于根据所述群组标识, 查询所述群组标识对应的群组的预定义 区域信息; 判断模块 13 , 用于根据查询到的预定义区域信息和所述终端当前 所在小区的小区标识, 判断所述终端是否位于所述群组的预定义区域内; 发 送模块 14, 用于根据判断结果, 向所述终端发送 PTT通信建立响应。  FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of the server of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 10, the server 1000 of this embodiment may include: a receiving module 11, a querying module 12, a determining module 13, and a sending module 14. The receiving module 11 is configured to receive a PTT communication setup request sent by the terminal, where the PTT communication setup request carries a group identifier and a cell identifier of a cell where the terminal is currently located, and the query module 12 is configured to use, according to the group And determining, by the determining module, the determining unit 13 , configured to determine, according to the pre-defined area information that is queried and the cell identifier of the cell where the terminal is currently located, whether the terminal is located The pre-defined area of the group; the sending module 14 is configured to send a PTT communication setup response to the terminal according to the determination result.
本实施例的服务器, 可以用于执行图 1所示方法实施例的技术方案, 具 备相应的功能模块, 其实现原理与图 1所示实施例类似, 此处不再赘述。 本 实施例的装置, 通过服务器在接收终端发送的 PTT通信建立请求时, 查询并 判断该终端是否位于其想要进行 PTT通信的群组的预定义区域之内, 根据不 同的判断结果向该终端发送不同的 PTT通信建立响应,实现 PTT通信的预定 所有的交互信息对于通信网络来说均是用户面的信息, 不涉及通信网络控制 面信令, 因此, 本实施例的方法可以不改变现有的无线 IP 网络而实现 PTT 通信的预定义区域功能, 降低了实现成本。 The server of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 1 , and has a corresponding function module, and the implementation principle thereof is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 1 , and details are not described herein again. The device of the embodiment, when the server receives the PTT communication establishment request sent by the terminal, queries and determines whether the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group for which the PTT communication is to be performed, and sends the terminal to the terminal according to different judgment results. Sending different PTT communication setup responses, all predetermined interaction information for implementing PTT communication is user plane information for the communication network, and does not involve communication network control. Face signaling, therefore, the method of the embodiment can implement the predefined area function of PTT communication without changing the existing wireless IP network, and the implementation cost is reduced.
上述实施例在实际实现时, 发送模块 14具体用于, 如果所述终端位于所 述群组的预定义区域之内, 则向所述终端发送 PTT通信建立响应, 所述 PTT 通信建立响应中携带所述群组的群组标识、 所述群组的预定义区域信息。  In the actual implementation, the sending module 14 is specifically configured to: if the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group, send a PTT communication setup response to the terminal, where the PTT communication setup response is carried. a group identifier of the group, and predefined area information of the group.
PTT通信建立响应中携带该群组的群组标识和该群组的预定义信息, 是 为了使该群组的终端能够自行判断自身是否位于该群组的预定义区域之内。  The PTT communication setup response carries the group identity of the group and the predefined information of the group, so that the terminal of the group can determine for itself whether it is located in a predefined area of the group.
PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信已建立消息和 PTT通信允许建立消息, 具体地, 如果该终端想要建立 PTT通信的群组当前正在进行 PTT通信, 则服 务器向该终端发送 PTT通信已建立消息;如果该终端想要建立 PTT通信的群 组的 PTT通信未建立, 则服务器向该终端发送 PTT通信允许建立消息。  The PTT communication setup response includes a PTT communication established message and a PTT communication permission establishment message. Specifically, if the group that the terminal wants to establish the PTT communication is currently performing PTT communication, the server sends a PTT communication established message to the terminal; If the PTT communication of the group that the terminal wants to establish PTT communication is not established, the server sends a PTT communication permission establishment message to the terminal.
而如果所述终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之外,则发送模块 14具体用 于, 向所述终端发送的 PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信建立失败的消息。  And if the terminal is located outside the predefined area of the group, the sending module 14 is specifically configured to: the PTT communication setup response sent to the terminal includes a message that the PTT communication establishment fails.
图 10所示的服务器实施例, 进一步地, 在具体实现时, 发送模块 14还 可以用于: 如果所述群组标识对应的群组的 PTT通信未建立, 则向所述群组 的其它终端发送寻呼消息 , 所述寻呼消息中携带所述群组的群组标识和所述 群组的预定义区域信息; 接收模块 11还用于, 接收所述群组的其它终端发送 的寻呼响应消息, 所述寻呼响应消息中携带所述群组的群组标识, 所述寻呼 响应消息是所述其它终端在根据自身当前所在小区的小区标识判断处于所述 预定义区域之内后发送的。  The server embodiment shown in FIG. 10, further, in a specific implementation, the sending module 14 is further configured to: if the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier is not established, to other terminals of the group Sending a paging message, where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group; the receiving module 11 is further configured to: receive the paging sent by other terminals of the group In response to the message, the paging response message carries the group identity of the group, and the paging response message is that the other terminal is determined to be within the predefined area according to the cell identity of the cell in which the current cell is located. Sent.
图 11为本发明服务器实施例二的结构示意图, 如图 11所示, 本实施例 的服务器 1100在图 10所示服务器结构的基础上, 进一步地, 接收模块 11还 用于, 接收所述群组的终端发送的离开预定义区域的消息, 所述离开预定义 区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识; 对应地, 本 实施例的服务器还包括, 移出模块 15, 用于将所述终端移出所述群组的 PTT 通信。 进一步地, 接收模块 11还用于, 接收所述群组的终端发送的进入预定 义区域的消息, 所述进入预定义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识和所 述群组的群组标识; 对应地, 本实施例的服务器还包括, 加入模块 16, 用于 将所述终端加入所述群组的 PTT通信。  FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a second embodiment of a server according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 11, the server 1100 of the present embodiment is based on the server structure shown in FIG. 10. Further, the receiving module 11 is further configured to receive the group. a message sent by the terminal of the group to leave the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group; correspondingly, the server in this embodiment further includes: Module 15, a PTT communication for moving the terminal out of the group. Further, the receiving module 11 is further configured to: receive a message that is sent by the terminal of the group to enter a predefined area, where the message that enters the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group of the group Correspondingly, the server in this embodiment further includes: an adding module 16, configured to join the terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
图 11所示的服务器实施例, 进一步地, 在具体实现时, 接收模块 11还 用于, 接收所述群组的终端发送呼叫结束请求; 发送模块 14还用于向所述群 组的所有终端发送呼叫结束消息, 以使所述群组的所有终端删除所述群组的 预定义区域信息。 The server embodiment shown in FIG. 11 further, in a specific implementation, the receiving module 11 further The terminal that receives the group sends a call end request; the sending module 14 is further configured to send a call end message to all terminals of the group, so that all terminals of the group delete the pre-group Define area information.
本实施例的服务器, 可以用于执行图 2所示方法实施例的技术方案, 具 备相应的功能模块, 其实现原理和技术效果与图 2所示方法实施例类似, 此 处不再赘述。  The server of this embodiment can be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and has corresponding functional modules. The implementation principle and technical effects are similar to the method embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and details are not described herein again.
图 12为本发明终端实施例一的结构示意图,本实施例对应的终端为发送 PTT通信建立请求的终端。 如图 12所示, 本实施例的终端 1200可以包括: 发送模块 21、 接收模块 22和处理模块 23 , 其中, 发送模块 21 , 用于向服务 器发送 PTT通信建立请求,所述 PTT通信建立请求中携带群组标识和所述终 端当前所在小区的小区标识; 接收模块 22, 用于接收所述服务器发送的 PTT 通信建立响应, 所述 PTT通信建立响应是所述服务器根据所述群组标识对应 的群组的预定义区域信息和所述终端当前所在小区的小区标识, 判断所述终 端是否位于所述群组的预定义区域内并根据判断结果发送的; 处理模块 23 , 用于根据所述 PPT通信建立响应, 确定是否加入所述 PPT通信。  FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a terminal according to the present invention. The terminal corresponding to this embodiment is a terminal that sends a PTT communication setup request. As shown in FIG. 12, the terminal 1200 of this embodiment may include: a sending module 21, a receiving module 22, and a processing module 23, where the sending module 21 is configured to send a PTT communication establishment request to the server, where the PTT communication establishment request is Carrying the group identifier and the cell identifier of the cell where the terminal is currently located; the receiving module 22 is configured to receive a PTT communication setup response sent by the server, where the PTT communication setup response is that the server corresponds to the group identifier Pre-defined area information of the group and the cell identifier of the cell in which the terminal is currently located, determining whether the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group and transmitting according to the determination result; and processing module 23, configured to perform, according to the PPT The communication establishes a response to determine whether to join the PPT communication.
本实施例的终端, 可以用于执行图 3所示方法实施例的技术方案, 具备 相应的功能模块, 其实现原理与图 3所示实施例类似, 此处不再赘述。 本实 施例的装置, 通过终端向服务器发送的 PTT通信建立请求中携带群组标识和 该终端的当前小区标识, 使服务器能够根据群组标识查询该群组的预定义区 域信息, 从而判断该终端是否位于该群组的预定义区域之内, 并接收服务器 根据判断结果向该终端发送的不同的 PTT通信建立响应,实现 PTT通信建立 阶段的预定义区域功能; 上述服务器与终端所有交互均是通过现有的无线 IP 网络进行的, 所有的交互信息对于通信网络来说均是用户面的信息, 不涉及 通信网络控制面信令, 因此, 本实施例的方法可以不改变现有的无线 IP网络 而实现 PTT通信的预定义区域功能, 降低了实现成本。  The terminal in this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 3, and has a corresponding function module, and the implementation principle thereof is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, and details are not described herein again. In the apparatus of this embodiment, the PTT communication setup request sent by the terminal to the server carries the group identifier and the current cell identifier of the terminal, so that the server can query the predefined area information of the group according to the group identifier, thereby determining the terminal. Whether it is located in a predefined area of the group, and receives a different PTT communication establishment response sent by the server to the terminal according to the judgment result, and implements a predefined area function in the PTT communication establishment phase; all interactions between the server and the terminal are passed In the existing wireless IP network, all the interaction information is user plane information for the communication network, and does not involve communication network control plane signaling. Therefore, the method of this embodiment may not change the existing wireless IP network. The implementation of the predefined area function of PTT communication reduces the implementation cost.
图 12所示的终端实施例, 在具体实现时, 接收模块 22所接收的 PTT通 信建立响应, 当所述 PTT通信建立响应是在所述服务器判断所述终端位于所 述群组的预定义区域之外时发送的时,所述 PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信 建立失败的消息。  The terminal embodiment shown in FIG. 12, in a specific implementation, the PTT communication setup response received by the receiving module 22, when the PTT communication setup response is determined by the server, the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group. When sent outside, the PTT communication setup response includes a message that the PTT communication establishment failed.
图 12 所示的终端实施例, 进一步地, 在具体实现时, 还用于, 当所述 PTT通信建立响应是在所述服务器判断所述终端位于所述群组的预定义区域 之内时发送的, 接收模块 22接收到的所述 ΡΤΤ通信建立响应包括 ΡΤΤ通信 已建立消息和 ΡΤΤ通信允许建立消息,且所述 ΡΤΤ通信建立响应中携带所述 群组的群组标识、 所述群组的预定义区域信息。 The terminal embodiment shown in FIG. 12, further, in a specific implementation, is also used when The PTT communication setup response is sent when the server determines that the terminal is located within a predefined area of the group, and the UI communication setup response received by the receiving module 22 includes: a communication established message and a communication permission Establishing a message, and the ΡΤΤ communication establishment response carries a group identifier of the group, and predefined area information of the group.
图 13为本发明终端实施例二的结构示意图,本实施例对应的终端为发送 FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a terminal according to the present invention. The terminal corresponding to this embodiment is sent.
ΡΤΤ通信建立请求的终端。 如图 13所示, 本实施例的终端 1300在图 12所示 终端结构的基础上, 还可以包括: 存储模块 24, 用于保存所述群组的预定义 区域信息; 区域监控模块 25 , 用于当所述终端移动时, 根据保存的预定义区 域信息和所述终端移动至小区的小区标识判断所述终端是否离开所述群组的 预定义区域, 以及用于, 当所述终端再次移动时, 根据保存的预定义区域信 息和所述终端移动至小区的小区标识判断判断所述终端是否进入所述群组的 预定义区域; 相应地, 发送模块 21还用于, 若区域监控模块 25判断所述终 端离开所述群组的预定义区域, 则, 向所述服务器发送离开预定义区域的消 息 , 所述离开预定义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识和所述群组的群 组标识, 以使所述服务器将所述终端移出所述群组的 ΡΤΤ通信; 以及用于, 若区域监控模块 25判断所述终端进入所述群组的预定义区域之内,则向所述 服务器发送进入预定义区域的消息, 所述进入预定义区域的消息中携带所述 终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识, 以使所述服务器将所述终端加入所 述群组的 ΡΤΤ通信。 ΡΤΤ Communication establishes the requesting terminal. As shown in FIG. 13, the terminal 1300 of this embodiment may further include: a storage module 24, configured to save predefined area information of the group, and a regional monitoring module 25, When the terminal moves, determining whether the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group according to the saved predefined area information and a cell identifier of the terminal moving to the cell, and for, when the terminal moves again And determining, according to the saved predefined area information and the cell identifier of the terminal moving to the cell, whether the terminal enters a predefined area of the group; correspondingly, the sending module 21 is further configured to: if the area monitoring module 25 Determining that the terminal leaves the predefined area of the group, and sending a message to the server to leave the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group a group identity, such that the server moves the terminal out of the group of communication; and if the area monitoring module 25 determines The terminal enters a predefined area of the group, and sends a message to the server to enter a predefined area, where the message entering the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group a group identity such that the server joins the terminal to the group's communication.
进一步地, 本实施例的终端, 接收模块 22还用于, 接收所述服务器发送 的呼叫结束消息, 所述呼叫结束消息中携带所述群组的群组标识; 本实施例 的终端还包括删除模块 26,用于删除本地保存的所述群组的预定义区域信息。  Further, in the terminal of the embodiment, the receiving module 22 is further configured to: receive a call end message sent by the server, where the call end message carries the group identifier of the group; the terminal in this embodiment further includes deleting The module 26 is configured to delete the predefined area information of the group that is saved locally.
本实施例的终端, 可以用于执行图 4所示方法实施例的技术方案, 具备 相应的功能模块, 其实现原理和技术效果与图 4所示方法实施例类似, 此处 不再赘述。  The terminal in this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 4, and has a corresponding function module. The implementation principle and technical effects are similar to the method embodiment shown in FIG. 4, and details are not described herein again.
图 14为本发明服务器实施例三的结构示意图,本实施例对应的装置为向 寻呼终端发送寻呼消息的服务器装置。如图 14所示,本实施例的服务器 1400 可以包括: 处理模块 31和发送模块 32, 其中, 处理模块 31 , 用于确定允许 建立群组的 ΡΤΤ通信; 发送模块 32, 用于向所述群组的终端发送所述群组的 ΡΤΤ通信的寻呼消息, 所述寻呼消息中携带所述群组的群组标识和所述群组 的预定义区域信息。 FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 3 of a server according to the present invention. The device corresponding to this embodiment is a server device that sends a paging message to a paging terminal. As shown in FIG. 14, the server 1400 of this embodiment may include: a processing module 31 and a sending module 32, where the processing module 31 is configured to determine a UI communication that allows a group to be established; and a sending module 32 is configured to send the group The terminal of the group sends a paging message of the communication of the group, where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the group Predefined area information.
本实施例的装置, 可以用于执行图 5所示方法实施例的技术方案, 具备 相应的功能模块, 其实现原理与图 5所示方法实施例类似, 此处不再赘述。 本实施例的服务器, 通过服务器在向终端发送的寻呼消息中携带该群组的群 组标识和预定义区域信息, 以使终端能够自行判断自身是否位于预定义区域 之内, 从而使终端能够根据判断的情况执行不同的操作, 例如返回寻呼响应 或不返回寻呼响应, 以及在后续的 PTT通信过程中发送进入或离开所述群组 的预定义区域的消息, 从而实现 PTT通信的预定义区域功能; 由于以上实现 预定义区域功能的过程中, 服务器与终端的信息交互可以通过现有的无线 IP 网络实现, 而所交互的信息对于无线 IP网络来说均是用户面的信息, 与无线 IP网络本身不需要交互, 也不涉及通信网络中控制面信令; 也就是说, 本实 施例的服务器与终端可以通过现有的任意一个无线 IP网络进行通信, 并不需 要改变现有通信网络中的任何网元, 从而实现了在现有移动网络的基础上使 The device of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 5, and has a corresponding function module, and the implementation principle thereof is similar to the method embodiment shown in FIG. 5, and details are not described herein again. The server of the embodiment carries the group identifier and the predefined area information of the group in the paging message sent by the server, so that the terminal can determine whether it is located in the predefined area, so that the terminal can enable the terminal to Performing different operations according to the determined situation, such as returning a page response or not returning a page response, and transmitting a message entering or leaving a predefined area of the group in a subsequent PTT communication process, thereby implementing a pre-PTT communication Defining the regional function; Because the above implementation of the predefined regional function, the information interaction between the server and the terminal can be implemented through the existing wireless IP network, and the information exchanged is the user's information for the wireless IP network, and The wireless IP network itself does not need to interact, nor does it involve control plane signaling in the communication network; that is, the server and the terminal in this embodiment can communicate through any existing wireless IP network, and does not need to change the existing communication. Any network element in the network, thus realizing the base of the existing mobile network Make up
PTT通信具有预定义区域的功能,降低了预定义区域的 PTT通信的实现成本。 PTT communication has the function of a predefined area, which reduces the implementation cost of PTT communication in a predefined area.
图 15为本发明服务器实施例四的结构示意图,本实施例对应的装置为向 寻呼终端发送寻呼消息的服务器装置。如图 15所示,本实施例的服务器 1500 在图 14所示服务器结构的基础上, 还包括: 接收模块 33 , 用于接收所述群 组的终端发送的寻呼响应消息, 所述寻呼响应消息中携带所述群组的群组标 识, 所述寻呼响应消息是所述终端在根据自身当前小区的小区标识判断当前 处于所述预定义区域之内后发送的。  FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 4 of a server according to the present invention. The device corresponding to this embodiment is a server device that sends a paging message to a paging terminal. As shown in FIG. 15, the server 1500 of the embodiment further includes: a receiving module 33, configured to receive a paging response message sent by the terminal of the group, where the paging is performed. The response message carries the group identifier of the group, and the paging response message is sent by the terminal after determining that the terminal is currently within the predefined area according to the cell identity of the current cell.
进一步地, 接收模块 33还用于, 在所述接收所述群组的终端发送的寻呼 响应消息之后, 接收所述群组的终端发送的离开预定义区域的消息, 所述离 开预定义区域的消息中携带终端标识和所述群组的群组标识; 相应地, 还可 以包括: 移出模块 34, 用于将所述终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。  Further, the receiving module 33 is further configured to, after the paging response message sent by the terminal that receives the group, receive a message that is sent by the terminal of the group to leave a predefined area, where the leaving the predefined area The message carries the terminal identifier and the group identifier of the group; correspondingly, the message may further include: a removal module 34, configured to move the terminal out of the PTT communication of the group.
进一步地, 接收模块 33还用于, 在所述向所述群组的终端发送所述群组 的 PTT通信的寻呼消息之后, 或所述接收所述群组的终端发送的离开预定义 区域的消息之后, 接收所述群组的终端发送的进入预定义区域的消息, 所述 进入预定义区域的消息中携带终端标识和群组标识; 相应地, 还可以包括: 加入模块 35, 将所述终端加入所述群组的 PTT通信。  Further, the receiving module 33 is further configured to: after sending the paging message of the PTT communication of the group to the terminal of the group, or leaving the predefined area sent by the terminal receiving the group After receiving the message, the terminal that receives the predefined area is sent by the terminal of the group, and the message that enters the predefined area carries the terminal identifier and the group identifier. Correspondingly, the method further includes: adding module 35, The terminal joins the PTT communication of the group.
进一步的, 接收模块 33还用于, 在所述接收所述群组的终端发送的寻呼 响应消息之后, 接收所述群组的终端发送的呼叫结束请求; 发送模块 32还用 于, 向所述群组的所有终端发送呼叫结束消息, 以使所述群组的所有终端删 除所述群组的预定义区域信息。 Further, the receiving module 33 is further configured to: send the paging sent by the terminal that receives the group After the response message, the call end request sent by the terminal of the group is received; the sending module 32 is further configured to send a call end message to all terminals of the group, so that all terminals of the group delete the group Predefined area information for the group.
本实施例的服务器, 可以用于执行图 6所示方法实施例的技术方案, 具 备相应的功能模块, 其实现原理和技术效果与图 6所示方法实施例类似, 此 处不再赘述。  The server of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 6, and has corresponding functional modules. The implementation principle and technical effects are similar to the method embodiment shown in FIG. 6, and details are not described herein again.
图 16为本发明终端实施例三的结构示意图,本实施例对应的终端为接收 寻呼消息的终端。 如图 16所示, 本实施例的终端 1600可以包括: 接收模块 41和存储模块 42, 其中, 接收模块 41 , 用于接收服务器发送的群组的 PTT 通信的寻呼消息 , 所述寻呼消息中携带所述群组的群组标识和所述群组的预 定义区域信息; 存储模块 42, 用于对应所述群组标识, 保存所述群组的预定 义区域信息。  FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 3 of a terminal according to the present invention. The terminal corresponding to this embodiment is a terminal that receives a paging message. As shown in FIG. 16, the terminal 1600 of this embodiment may include: a receiving module 41 and a storage module 42, where the receiving module 41 is configured to receive a paging message of a PTT communication of a group sent by a server, where the paging message is And carrying the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group; the storage module 42 is configured to save the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier.
本实施例的终端, 可以用于执行图 7所示方法实施例的技术方案, 具备 相应的功能模块, 其实现原理与图 7所示实施例类似, 此处不再赘述。 本实 施例的终端, 通过接收服务器发送的群组的 PTT通信寻呼消息中携带群组标 识和预定义区域信息, 使终端能够判断自身当前是否位于该群组的预定义区 域之内,以根据判断结果决定是否向服务器发送寻呼响应消息,从而实现 PTT 通信的预定义区域功能; 上述服务器与终端所有交互均是通过现有的无线 IP 网络进行的, 所有的交互信息对于通信网络来说均是用户面的信息, 不涉及 通信网络控制面信令, 因此, 本实施例的方法可以不改变现有的无线 IP网络 而实现 PTT通信的预定义区域功能, 降低了实现成本。  The terminal of the embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 7 , and has a corresponding function module, and the implementation principle thereof is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 , and details are not described herein again. The terminal in this embodiment carries the group identifier and the predefined area information in the PTT communication paging message of the group sent by the receiving server, so that the terminal can determine whether it is currently located in the predefined area of the group, according to The judgment result determines whether to send a paging response message to the server, thereby implementing a predefined area function of the PTT communication; all the interaction between the server and the terminal is performed through the existing wireless IP network, and all the interaction information is for the communication network. The user plane information is not related to the communication network control plane signaling. Therefore, the method in this embodiment can implement the predefined area function of the PTT communication without changing the existing wireless IP network, thereby reducing the implementation cost.
图 17为本发明终端实施例四的结构示意图,本实施例对应的终端为接收 寻呼消息的终端。 如图 17所示, 本实施例的终端 1700在图 16所示终端结构 的基础上, 还可以包括: 区域监控模块 43和发送模块 44, 区域监控模块 43 , 用于根据所述终端的当前小区的小区标识和所述预定义区域信息判断所述终 端当前是否位于所述群组的预定义区域之内; 发送模块 44, 用于如果所述终 端当前位于所述群组的预定义区域之内,则向所述服务器发送寻呼响应消息, 所述寻呼响应消息中携带所述群组的群组标识。  FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 4 of a terminal according to the present invention. The terminal corresponding to this embodiment is a terminal that receives a paging message. As shown in FIG. 17, the terminal 1700 of the present embodiment may further include: an area monitoring module 43 and a sending module 44, and an area monitoring module 43 for using the current cell of the terminal, based on the terminal structure shown in FIG. The cell identifier and the predefined area information determine whether the terminal is currently located in a predefined area of the group; the sending module 44 is configured to: if the terminal is currently located in a predefined area of the group And sending a paging response message to the server, where the paging response message carries the group identifier of the group.
进一步地, 区域监控模块 43还用于, 如果所述终端当前位于所述群组的 预定义区域之外, 且所述终端移动之后, 根据保存的预定义区域信息和所述 终端移动至小区的小区标识确定所述终端是否进入所述群组的预定义区域; 相应地, 发送模块 44还用于, 当区域监控模块 43确定所述终端进入所述群 组的预定义区域时, 向所述服务器发送进入预定义区域的消息, 所述进入预 定义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识, 以使所 述服务器将所述终端加入所述群组的 PTT通信。 Further, the area monitoring module 43 is further configured to: if the terminal is currently located outside the predefined area of the group, and after the terminal moves, according to the saved predefined area information and the The cell identifier of the terminal moving to the cell determines whether the terminal enters a predefined area of the group; correspondingly, the sending module 44 is further configured to: when the area monitoring module 43 determines that the terminal enters a predefined area of the group Sending a message to the server to enter a predefined area, where the message entering the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group, so that the server joins the terminal PTT communication of the group.
进一步地, 区域监控模块 43还用于, 在发送模块 44向所述服务器发送 进入预定义区域的消息, 或所述向所述服务器发送寻呼响应消息之后, 当所 述终端移动时, 根据保存的预定义区域信息和所述终端移动至小区的小区标 识确定所述终端是否离开所述群组的预定义区域; 发送模块 44还用于, 当区 域监控模块 43确定所述终端离开所述群组的预定义区域时,向所述服务器发 送离开预定义区域的消息, 所述离开预定义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终 端标识和所述群组的群组标识, 以使所述服务器将所述终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。  Further, the area monitoring module 43 is further configured to: after the sending module 44 sends a message to the server to enter a predefined area, or after sending the paging response message to the server, when the terminal moves, according to saving The pre-defined area information and the cell identity of the terminal moving to the cell determine whether the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group; the sending module 44 is further configured to: when the area monitoring module 43 determines that the terminal leaves the group And sending, by the server, a message that leaves the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group, so that the server The terminal is moved out of the PTT communication of the group.
进一步地, 接收模块 41还用于, 接收所述服务器发送的呼叫结束消息, 所述呼叫结束消息中携带所述群组的群组标识; 本实施例的终端还包括: 删 除模块 45 , 用于删除本地保存的所述群组的预定义区域信息。  Further, the receiving module 41 is further configured to: receive a call end message sent by the server, where the call end message carries a group identifier of the group; the terminal in this embodiment further includes: a deleting module 45, configured to: Delete the predefined area information of the group saved locally.
本实施例的终端, 可以用于执行图 8所示方法实施例的技术方案, 具备 相应的功能模块, 其实现原理和技术效果与图 8所示方法实施例类似, 此处 不再赘述。  The terminal of the embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 8, and the corresponding functional module is provided. The implementation principle and the technical effect are similar to the method embodiment shown in FIG. 8, and details are not described herein again.
图 18为本发明通信系统实施例一的结构示意图, 如图 18所示, 本实施例 的系统 1800可以包括:服务器、一个发起终端以及至少一个寻呼终端,其中, 发起终端为发送 PTT通信建立请求的终端,寻呼终端为接收寻呼消息的终端。 其中, 服务器可以釆用图 10或图 11所示的服务器实施例的结构, 其对应地, 可以执行图 1或图 2所示的方法实施例的技术方案, 其实现原理和技术效果 类似, 此处不再赘述; 发起终端可以釆用图 12或图 13所示的终端实施例的 结构, 其对应地, 可以执行图 3或图 4所示的方法实施例的技术方案, 其实 现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述; 至少一个寻呼终端可以釆用图 16或 图 17所示的终端实施例的结构, 其对应地, 可以执行图 7或图 8所示的方法 实施例的技术方案, 其实现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a communication system according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 18, the system 1800 of this embodiment may include: a server, an originating terminal, and at least one paging terminal, where the initiating terminal establishes a PTT communication for sending. The requested terminal, the paging terminal is a terminal that receives the paging message. The server may use the structure of the server embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or FIG. 11 , and correspondingly, the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 may be performed, and the implementation principle and the technical effect are similar. The initiating terminal can use the structure of the terminal embodiment shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 13 , and correspondingly, the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 can be executed, and the implementation principle and technology thereof are implemented. The effect is similar, and is not described here again; at least one paging terminal may use the structure of the terminal embodiment shown in FIG. 16 or FIG. 17, and correspondingly, the technology of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 7 or FIG. 8 may be executed. The implementation principle and technical effects of the solution are similar, and will not be described here.
图 19为本发明通信系统实施例二的结构示意图, 如图 19所示, 本实施例 的系统 1900可以包括: 服务器以及至少一个寻呼终端, 其中, 寻呼终端为接 收寻呼消息的终端。 其中, 服务器可以釆用图 14或图 15所示的服务器实施 例的结构, 其对应地, 可以执行图 5或图 6所示的方法实施例的技术方案, 其实现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述; 至少一个寻呼终端可以釆用图 16或图 17所示的终端实施例的结构, 其对应地, 可以执行图 7或图 8所示 的方法实施例的技术方案, 其实现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。 FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a communication system according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 19, this embodiment is shown in FIG. The system 1900 can include: a server and at least one paging terminal, wherein the paging terminal is a terminal that receives the paging message. The server may use the structure of the server embodiment shown in FIG. 14 or FIG. 15 , and correspondingly, the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. 6 may be performed, and the implementation principle and the technical effect are similar. The structure of the terminal embodiment shown in FIG. 16 or FIG. 17 can be used, and correspondingly, the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 7 or FIG. 8 can be implemented. The principle and technical effects are similar and will not be described here.
图 20为本发明服务器实施例五的结构示意图,本实施例对应的服务器为 与发起终端进行交互的服务器。 如图 20所示, 本实施例的服务器 2000可以 包括: 接收电路 2001、 发送电路 2002、 存储器 2003以及处理器 2004。  FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 5 of the server according to the present invention. The server corresponding to this embodiment is a server that interacts with the originating terminal. As shown in FIG. 20, the server 2000 of this embodiment may include: a receiving circuit 2001, a transmitting circuit 2002, a memory 2003, and a processor 2004.
其中, 存储器 2003存储至少一个群组的群组标识和预定义区域信息; 接 收电路 2001用于接收终端发送的 PTT通信建立请求, 所述 PTT通信建立请 求中携带群组标识和所述终端当前所在小区的小区标识;处理器 2004分别与 接收电路 2001、 发送电路 2002、 存储器 2003连接, 用于执行以下操作: 根 据接收电路 2001接收的群组标识, 从存储器 2003中查询所述群组标识对应 的群组的预定义区域信息; 根据查询到的预定义区域信息与所述接收电路接 收到的小区标识, 判断所述终端是否位于所述群组的预定义区域内; 根据判 断结果, 通过发送电路 2002向所述终端发送 PPT通信建立响应。  The memory 2003 stores the group identifier and the predefined area information of the at least one group. The receiving circuit 2001 is configured to receive the PTT communication setup request sent by the terminal, where the PTT communication setup request carries the group identifier and the current location of the terminal. The cell identifier of the cell is connected to the receiving circuit 2001, the transmitting circuit 2002, and the memory 2003, respectively, for performing the following operations: querying, according to the group identifier received by the receiving circuit 2001, the corresponding identifier of the group identifier from the memory 2003. Pre-defined area information of the group; determining, according to the queried predefined area information and the cell identifier received by the receiving circuit, whether the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group; 2002 sends a PPT communication setup response to the terminal.
在具体实现时, 接收电路 2001、 发送电路 2002可以为独立的两个电路, 也可以集成为收发电路。  In a specific implementation, the receiving circuit 2001 and the transmitting circuit 2002 may be two independent circuits, or may be integrated into a transmitting and receiving circuit.
进一步地, 处理器 2004根据判断结果, 通过发送电路 2002向所述终端 发送 PTT通信建立响应, 可以包括: 如果所述终端位于所述群组的预定义区 域之内, 向所述终端发送 PTT通信建立响应, 所述 PTT通信建立响应中携带 所述群组的群组标识、 所述群组的预定义区域信息, 其中, 所述 PTT通信建 立响应包括 PTT通信已建立消息或 PTT通信允许建立消息;如果所述终端位 于所述群组的预定义区域之外, 向所述终端发送 PTT通信建立响应, 其中, 所述 PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信建立失败的消息。  Further, the processor 2004 sends a PTT communication setup response to the terminal by using the sending circuit 2002 according to the determination result, which may include: if the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group, sending a PTT communication to the terminal. Establishing a response, the PTT communication setup response carrying the group identifier of the group, the predefined area information of the group, where the PTT communication establishment response includes a PTT communication established message or a PTT communication permission establishment message And if the terminal is located outside the predefined area of the group, sending a PTT communication setup response to the terminal, where the PTT communication establishment response includes a message that the PTT communication establishment fails.
进一步地, 如果所述终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之内, 向所述终端 发送 PTT通信建立响应具体包括:如果所述群组标识对应的群组的 PTT通信 已建立, 则向所述终端发送 PTT通信已建立消息; 如果所述群组标识对应的 群组的 PTT通信未建立, 则向所述终端发送 PTT通信允许建立消息。 进一步地, 如果所述群组标识对应的群组的 PTT通信未建立, 则处理器Further, if the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group, sending a PTT communication setup response to the terminal specifically includes: if the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier is established, The terminal sends a PTT communication established message; if the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier is not established, sending a PTT communication permission establishment message to the terminal. Further, if the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier is not established, the processor
2004执行的操作还包括: 向发送电路 2002发送指令, 通过发送电路 2002向 所述群组的其它终端发送寻呼消息 , 所述寻呼消息中携带所述群组的群组标 识和所述群组的预定义区域信息; 相应地, 接收电路 2001具体用于, 接收所 述群组的其它终端发送的寻呼响应消息 , 所述寻呼响应消息中携带所述群组 的群组标识, 所述寻呼响应消息是所述其它终端在根据自身当前所在小区的 小区标识判断当前处于所述预定义区域之内后发送的。 The operation performed in 2004 further includes: sending an instruction to the sending circuit 2002, and sending, by the sending circuit 2002, a paging message to the other terminals of the group, where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the group The pre-defined area information of the group; correspondingly, the receiving circuit 2001 is specifically configured to: receive a paging response message sent by another terminal of the group, where the paging response message carries the group identifier of the group, where The paging response message is sent by the other terminal after determining that it is currently within the predefined area according to the cell identity of the cell in which it is currently located.
进一步地,接收电路 2001还可以用于接收所述群组的终端发送的离开预 定义区域的消息, 所述离开预定义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识和 所述群组的群组标识; 相应地, 处理器 2004还用于, 将所述终端移出所述群 组的 ΡΤΤ通信。  Further, the receiving circuit 2001 may be further configured to receive a message that is sent by the terminal of the group to leave a predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group of the group. Correspondingly, the processor 2004 is further configured to: move the terminal out of the group of communication.
进一步地, 接收电路 2001还可以用于, 接收所述群组的终端发送的进入 预定义区域的消息, 所述进入预定义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识 和所述群组的群组标识; 相应地, 处理器 2004还用于, 将所述终端加入所述 群组的 ΡΤΤ通信。  Further, the receiving circuit 2001 may be further configured to: receive a message that is sent by the terminal of the group and enter a predefined area, where the message that enters the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group of the group The group identifier is correspondingly used by the processor 2004 to join the terminal to the group communication.
进一步地, 接收电路 2001还可以用于, 接收所述群组的终端发送呼叫结 束请求; 相应地, 处理器 2004还用于向发送电路 2002发送指令, 通过发送 电路 2002向所述群组的所有终端发送呼叫结束消息,以使所述群组的所有终 端删除所述群组的预定义区域信息。  Further, the receiving circuit 2001 may be further configured to: receive, by the terminal, the terminal to send a call end request; accordingly, the processor 2004 is further configured to send an instruction to the sending circuit 2002, to all the groups by using the sending circuit 2002. The terminal sends a call end message to cause all terminals of the group to delete the predefined area information of the group.
本实施例提供的服务器, 可以用于执行图 1或图 2所示方法实施的技术 方案以及图 9所示方法实施例的技术方案中服务器对应执行的与发起终端交 互的部分, 其实现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。 图 20仅为本发明提 供的通信设备的结构的一种示意图, 具体结构可根据实际进行调整。  The server provided in this embodiment may be used to perform the technical solution implemented by the method shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 and the part of the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 9 that is executed by the server and interacts with the initiating terminal, and the implementation principle thereof is The technical effects are similar and will not be described here. Figure 20 is only a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided by the present invention, and the specific structure can be adjusted according to actual conditions.
图 21为本发明终端实施例五的结构示意图,本实施例对应的终端为发起 终端。 如图 21所示, 本实施例的终端 2100可以包括: 接收机 2101、 发送机 2102、 存储器 2103以及处理器 2104。  FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 5 of a terminal according to the present invention. The terminal corresponding to this embodiment is an originating terminal. As shown in FIG. 21, the terminal 2100 of this embodiment may include: a receiver 2101, a transmitter 2102, a memory 2103, and a processor 2104.
其中, 发送机 2102用于, 向服务器发送 ΡΤΤ通信建立请求, 所述 ΡΤΤ 通信建立请求中携带群组标识和所述终端当前所在小区的小区标识; 接收机 2101用于, 接收所述服务器发送的 ΡΤΤ通信建立响应, 所述 ΡΤΤ通信建立 响应中携带所述群组标识和所述群组标识对应的群组的预定义区域信息, 所 述 PTT通信建立响应是所述服务器根据所述群组标识对应的群组的预定义区 域信息和所述终端当前所在小区的小区标识, 判断所述终端是否位于所述群 组的预定义区域内并根据判断结果发送的; 处理器 2104用于, 根据所述 ΡΡΤ 通信建立响应,确定是否加入所述群组的 ΡΡΤ通信,例如可以通过提示用户, 结合用户输入的指令信息, 确定是否加入所述群组的 ΡΤΤ通信。 The transmitter 2102 is configured to: send a ΡΤΤ communication establishment request to the server, where the ΡΤΤ communication establishment request carries a group identifier and a cell identifier of a cell where the terminal is currently located; and the receiver 2101 is configured to receive, by the server, ΡΤΤCommunication establishment response, the ΡΤΤ communication establishment response carrying the group identifier and the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier, The PTT communication establishment response is that the server determines, according to the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier, and the cell identifier of the cell where the terminal is currently located, whether the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group. And sending, according to the judgment result, the processor 2104, configured to determine, according to the ΡΡΤ communication establishment response, whether to join the ΡΡΤ communication of the group, for example, by prompting the user, in combination with the instruction information input by the user, determining whether to join the Group communication.
在具体实现时, 接收机 2101、 发送机 2102可以为独立的两个功能模块, 也可以集成为收发机。  In a specific implementation, the receiver 2101 and the transmitter 2102 may be two independent functional modules, or may be integrated into a transceiver.
进一步地, 如果所述 ΡΤΤ通信建立响应是在所述服务器判断所述终端位 于所述群组的预定义区域之外时发送的, 则接收机 2101接收的所述 ΡΤΤ通 信建立响应包括 ΡΤΤ通信建立失败的消息。  Further, if the ΡΤΤ communication establishment response is sent when the server determines that the terminal is located outside a predefined area of the group, the ΡΤΤ communication establishment response received by the receiver 2101 includes ΡΤΤ communication establishment The message of failure.
进一步地, 如果所述 ΡΤΤ通信建立响应是在所述服务器判断所述终端位 于所述群组的预定义区域之内时发送的, 则接收机 2101接收的所述 ΡΤΤ通 信建立响应包括 ΡΤΤ通信已建立消息或 ΡΤΤ通信允许建立消息,且所述 ΡΤΤ 通信建立响应携带所述群组的群组标识、 所述群组的预定义区域信息。  Further, if the ΡΤΤ communication establishment response is sent when the server determines that the terminal is located in a predefined area of the group, the ΡΤΤ communication establishment response received by the receiver 2101 includes Establishing a message or communication allows the message to be established, and the ΡΤΤ communication setup response carries the group identity of the group, the predefined area information of the group.
进一步地, 存储器 2103具体用于, 在接收所述服务器发送的 ΡΤΤ通信 建立响应之后, 保存所述群组的预定义区域信息。  Further, the memory 2103 is specifically configured to save the predefined area information of the group after receiving the ΡΤΤ communication establishment response sent by the server.
进一步地, 处理器 2104还可以用于, 当所述终端移动时, 根据保存的预 定义区域信息和所述终端移动至小区的小区标识判断所述终端是否离开所述 群组的预定义区域; 当判断结果为是时, 指示发送机 2102向所述服务器发送 离开预定义区域的消息, 所述离开预定义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端 标识和群组标识, 以使所述服务器将所述终端移出所述群组的 ΡΤΤ通信。  Further, the processor 2104 is further configured to: when the terminal moves, determine, according to the saved predefined area information and the cell identifier that the terminal moves to the cell, whether the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group; When the result of the determination is yes, the instructing the sender 2102 sends a message to the server to leave the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier and the group identifier of the terminal, so that the server will The terminal moves out of the group's communication.
进一步地, 处理器 2104还可以用于, 当所述终端再次移动时, 根据保存 的预定义区域信息和所述终端移动至小区的小区标识判断所述终端是否进入 所述群组的预定义区域; 当判断结果为是时, 指示发送机 2102向所述服务器 发送进入预定义区域的消息, 所述进入预定义区域的消息中携带终端标识和 群组标识, 以使所述服务器将所述终端加入所述群组的 ΡΤΤ通信。  Further, the processor 2104 is further configured to: when the terminal moves again, determine, according to the saved predefined area information, and the cell identifier that the terminal moves to the cell, whether the terminal enters a predefined area of the group. When the result of the determination is yes, the instructing the sender 2102 sends a message to the server to enter the predefined area, where the message entering the predefined area carries the terminal identifier and the group identifier, so that the server will use the terminal Join the group's communication.
进一步地, 接收机 2101还用于, 接收所述服务器发送的呼叫结束消息, 所述呼叫结束消息中携带所述群组的群组标识; 处理器 2104还用于, 删除本 地保存的所述群组的预定义区域信 , ¾。  Further, the receiver 2101 is further configured to: receive a call end message sent by the server, where the call end message carries a group identifier of the group; and the processor 2104 is further configured to: delete the locally saved group Group of predefined area letters, 3⁄4.
本实施例提供的终端, 可以用于执行图 3或图 4所示方法实施的技术方 案以及图 9所示方法实施例的技术方案中发起终端对应执行的部分, 其实现 原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。 图 21仅为本发明提供的通信设备的结 构的一种示意图, 具体结构可根据实际进行调整。 The terminal provided in this embodiment may be used to execute the technical implementation of the method shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. And the part of the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 9 corresponding to the execution of the terminal, the implementation principle and the technical effect are similar, and details are not described herein again. FIG. 21 is only a schematic diagram of the structure of the communication device provided by the present invention, and the specific structure may be adjusted according to actual conditions.
图 22为本发明服务器实施例六的结构示意图,本实施例对应的服务器为 与寻呼终端进行交互的服务器。 如图 22所示, 本实施例的服务器 2200可以 包括: 接收电路 2201、 发送电路 2202、 存储器 2203以及处理器 2204。  FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 6 of the server according to the present invention. The server corresponding to this embodiment is a server that interacts with the paging terminal. As shown in FIG. 22, the server 2200 of this embodiment may include: a receiving circuit 2201, a transmitting circuit 2202, a memory 2203, and a processor 2204.
其中, 存储器 2203存储至少一个群组的群组标识和预定义区域信息; 处 理器 2204用于确定允许建立群组的 PTT通信, 并指示发送电路 2202向所述 群组的终端发送所述群组的 PTT通信的寻呼消息, 所述寻呼消息中携带所述 群组的群组标识和所述群组的预定义区域信息。  The memory 2203 stores the group identifier and the predefined area information of the at least one group; the processor 2204 is configured to determine the PTT communication that allows the group to be established, and instruct the sending circuit 2202 to send the group to the terminal of the group. The paging message of the PTT communication, where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group.
在具体实现时, 接收电路 2201、 发送电路 2202可以为独立的两个电路, 也可以集成为收发电路。  In a specific implementation, the receiving circuit 2201 and the transmitting circuit 2202 may be two independent circuits, or may be integrated into a transmitting and receiving circuit.
进一步地, 接收电路 2201 用于接收所述群组的终端发送的寻呼响应消 息, 所述寻呼响应消息中携带所述群组的群组标识, 所述寻呼响应消息是所 述终端在根据自身当前小区的小区标识判断当前处于所述预定义区域之内后 发送的。  Further, the receiving circuit 2201 is configured to receive a paging response message sent by the terminal of the group, where the paging response message carries a group identifier of the group, and the paging response message is that the terminal is in the terminal It is determined to be sent after being within the predefined area according to the cell identity of the current cell of the current cell.
进一步地, 在接收所述群组的终端发送的寻呼响应消息之后, 接收电路 2201还用于, 接收所述群组的终端发送的离开预定义区域的消息, 所述离开 预定义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识; 相应 地, 处理器 2204还用于, 将所述终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。  Further, after receiving the paging response message sent by the terminal of the group, the receiving circuit 2201 is further configured to: receive a message that is sent by the terminal of the group and leave a predefined area, where the message leaves the predefined area. The terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group are carried in; correspondingly, the processor 2204 is further configured to: remove the terminal from the PTT communication of the group.
进一步地, 在向所述群组的终端发送所述群组的 PTT通信的寻呼消息之 后, 或所述接收所述群组的终端发送的离开预定义区域的消息之后, 接收电 路 2201还用于,接收所述群组的终端发送的进入预定义区域的消息, 所述进 入预定义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识; 相 应地, 处理器 2204还用于, 将所述终端加入所述群组的 PTT通信。  Further, after transmitting the paging message of the PTT communication of the group to the terminal of the group, or after receiving the message of the predefined area sent by the terminal of the group, the receiving circuit 2201 further uses And receiving a message that is sent by the terminal of the group to enter a predefined area, where the message that enters the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group; correspondingly, the processor 2204 Also used to join the terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
进一步地, 接收电路 2201还用于,接收所述群组的终端发送的呼叫结束 请求; 相应地, 处理器 2204还用于指示发送机 2202向所述群组的所有终端 发送呼叫结束消息, 以使所述群组的所有终端删除所述群组的预定义区域信 息。  Further, the receiving circuit 2201 is further configured to receive a call end request sent by the terminal of the group. Correspondingly, the processor 2204 is further configured to instruct the transmitter 2202 to send a call end message to all terminals of the group, to All terminals of the group are deleted from the predefined area information of the group.
本实施例提供的服务器, 可以用于执行图 5或图 6所示方法实施的技术 方案以及图 9所示方法实施例的技术方案中服务器对应执行的与寻呼终端交 互的部分, 其实现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。 图 22仅为本发明提 供的通信设备的结构的一种示意图, 具体结构可根据实际进行调整。 The server provided in this embodiment may be used to implement the technology implemented by the method shown in FIG. 5 or FIG. The scheme and the part of the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 9 that is performed by the server and interact with the paging terminal are similar in implementation principle and technical effects, and are not described herein again. FIG. 22 is only a schematic diagram of the structure of the communication device provided by the present invention, and the specific structure may be adjusted according to actual conditions.
图 23为本发明终端实施例六的结构示意图,本实施例对应的终端为寻呼 终端。 如图 23所示, 本实施例的终端 2300可以包括: 接收机 2301、 发送机 2302、 存储器 2303以及处理器 2304。  FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 6 of a terminal according to the present invention. The terminal corresponding to this embodiment is a paging terminal. As shown in FIG. 23, the terminal 2300 of this embodiment may include: a receiver 2301, a transmitter 2302, a memory 2303, and a processor 2304.
其中,接收机 2301 ,用于接收服务器发送的群组的 PTT通信的寻呼消息, 所述寻呼消息中携带所述群组的群组标识和所述群组的预定义区域信息; 处 理器 2304, 用于对应所述群组标识, 将所述群组的预定义区域信息保存在存 储器 2303上。  The receiver 2301 is configured to receive a paging message of the PTT communication of the group sent by the server, where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group; 2304. For corresponding to the group identifier, save the predefined area information of the group on the memory 2303.
在具体实现时, 接收机 2301、 发送机 2302可以为独立的两个功能模块, 也可以集成为收发机。  In a specific implementation, the receiver 2301 and the transmitter 2302 may be two independent functional modules, or may be integrated into a transceiver.
进一步地, 处理器 2304用于, 根据自身当前所在小区的小区标识和所述 预定义区域信息判断当前是否位于所述群组的预定义区域之内; 如果所述终 端当前位于所述群组的预定义区域之内,指示发送机 2302向所述服务器发送 寻呼响应消息 , 所述寻呼响应消息中携带所述群组的群组标识。  Further, the processor 2304 is configured to determine, according to the cell identifier of the current cell and the predefined area information, whether the current location is within the predefined area of the group; if the terminal is currently located in the group Within the predefined area, the instructing transmitter 2302 sends a paging response message to the server, where the paging response message carries the group identity of the group.
进一步地, 如果所述终端当前位于所述群组的预定义区域之外, 且所述 终端移动之后, 处理器 2304还用于: 根据保存的预定义区域信息和所述终端 移动至小区的小区标识确定所述终端是否进入所述群组的预定义区域; 当所 述终端进入所述群组的预定义区域之内时,指示发送机 2302向所述服务器发 送进入预定义区域的消息 , 所述进入预定义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终 端标识和所述群组的群组标识, 以使所述服务器将所述终端加入所述群组的 PTT通信。  Further, if the terminal is currently located outside the predefined area of the group, and the terminal moves, the processor 2304 is further configured to: move, according to the saved predefined area information, the cell that the terminal moves to the cell Determining whether the terminal enters a predefined area of the group; when the terminal enters a predefined area of the group, instructing the transmitter 2302 to send a message to the server to enter a predefined area, The message entering the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group, so that the server joins the terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
进一步地, 在所述向所述服务器发送进入预定义区域的消息, 或所述向 所述服务器发送寻呼响应消息之后,当所述终端移动时,处理器 2304还用于: 根据保存的预定义区域信息和所述终端移动至小区的小区标识确定所述终端 是否离开所述群组的预定义区域; 当所述终端离开所述群组的预定义区域时, 指示发送机 2302向所述服务器发送离开预定义区域的消息,所述离开预定义 区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识, 以使所述服 务器将所述终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。 进一步地, 在所述接收服务器发送的群组的 PTT通信的寻呼消息之后, 接收机 2301还用于, 接收所述服务器发送的呼叫结束消息, 所述呼叫结束消 息中携带所述群组的群组标识; 相应的, 处理器 2304还用于, 删除存储器 2303上保存的所述群组的预定义区域信息。 Further, after the sending the message to the server to enter the predefined area, or after sending the paging response message to the server, when the terminal moves, the processor 2304 is further configured to: according to the saved pre Defining the area information and the cell identity of the terminal moving to the cell to determine whether the terminal leaves a predefined area of the group; when the terminal leaves the predefined area of the group, instructing the transmitter 2302 to The server sends a message leaving the predefined area, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group, so that the server moves the terminal out of the group. PTT communication. Further, after the paging message of the PTT communication of the group sent by the receiving server, the receiver 2301 is further configured to receive a call end message sent by the server, where the call end message carries the group Correspondingly, the processor 2304 is further configured to delete the predefined area information of the group saved on the memory 2303.
本实施例提供的终端, 可以用于执行图 7或图 8所示方法实施的技术方 案以及图 9所示方法实施例的技术方案中寻呼终端对应执行的部分, 其实现 原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。 图 23仅为本发明提供的通信设备的结 构的一种示意图, 具体结构可根据实际进行调整。  The terminal provided in this embodiment may be used to perform the technical solution implemented by the method shown in FIG. 7 or FIG. 8 and the corresponding part of the paging terminal in the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 9, and the implementation principle and technical effect are similar. , will not repeat them here. Figure 23 is only a schematic diagram of the structure of the communication device provided by the present invention, and the specific structure can be adjusted according to the actual situation.
本发明还提供计算机程序产品实施例一, 包括计算机可读介质, 所述计 算机可读介质包括一组程序代码, 用于执行如图 1或图 2所示方法实施例所 述的方法。  The invention further provides a computer program product embodiment 1 comprising a computer readable medium, the computer readable medium comprising a set of program code for performing the method as described in the method embodiment shown in Fig. 1 or Fig. 2.
本发明还提供计算机程序产品实施例二, 包括计算机可读介质, 所述计 算机可读介质包括一组程序代码, 用于执行如图 3或图 4所示方法实施例所 述的方法。  The invention further provides a computer program product embodiment 2, comprising a computer readable medium, the computer readable medium comprising a set of program code for performing the method as described in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 3 or FIG.
本发明还提供计算机程序产品实施例三, 包括计算机可读介质, 所述计 算机可读介质包括一组程序代码, 用于执行如图 5或图 6所示方法实施例所 述的方法。  The invention further provides a computer program product embodiment 3, comprising a computer readable medium, the computer readable medium comprising a set of program code for performing the method as described in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 5 or FIG.
本发明还提供计算机程序产品实施例四, 包括计算机可读介质, 所述计 算机可读介质包括一组程序代码, 用于执行如图 7或图 8所示方法实施例所 述的方法。  The invention further provides a fourth embodiment of a computer program product, comprising a computer readable medium comprising a set of program code for performing the method as described in the method embodiment shown in Fig. 7 or Fig. 8.
本领域普通技术人员可以理解: 实现上述各方法实施例的全部或部分步 骤可以通过程序指令相关的硬件来完成。 前述的程序可以存储于一计算机可 读取存储介质中。 该程序在执行时, 执行包括上述各方法实施例的步骤; 而 前述的存储介质包括: ROM, RAM, 磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码 的介质。  One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that all or a portion of the steps to implement the various method embodiments described above can be accomplished by hardware associated with the program instructions. The aforementioned program can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. The program, when executed, performs the steps including the foregoing method embodiments; and the foregoing storage medium includes: a medium that can store program codes, such as a ROM, a RAM, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.
最后应说明的是: 以上各实施例仅用以说明本发明的技术方案, 而非对 其限制; 尽管参照前述各实施例对本发明进行了详细的说明, 本领域的普通 技术人员应当理解:其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改, 或者对其中部分或者全部技术特征进行等同替换; 而这些修改或者替换, 并 不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本发明各实施例技术方案的范围。  Finally, it should be noted that the above embodiments are only for explaining the technical solutions of the present invention, and are not intended to be limiting thereof; although the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, those skilled in the art will understand that The technical solutions described in the foregoing embodiments may be modified, or some or all of the technical features may be equivalently replaced; and the modifications or substitutions do not deviate from the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present invention. range.

Claims

权 利 要求 书 claims
1、 一种按讲 PTT通信方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 1. A push-to-talk PTT communication method, characterized by including:
服务器接收终端发送的 PTT通信建立请求,所述 PTT通信建立请求中携 带群组标识和所述终端当前所在小区的小区标识; The server receives the PTT communication establishment request sent by the terminal, and the PTT communication establishment request carries the group identification and the cell identification of the cell where the terminal is currently located;
根据所述群组标识, 查询所述群组标识对应的群组的预定义区域信息; 根据查询到的预定义区域信息和所述终端当前所在小区的小区标识, 判 断所述终端是否位于所述群组的预定义区域内; According to the group identifier, query the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier; according to the queried predefined area information and the cell identifier of the cell where the terminal is currently located, determine whether the terminal is located in the Within a predefined area of the group;
根据判断结果, 向所述终端发送 PTT通信建立响应。 According to the judgment result, a PTT communication establishment response is sent to the terminal.
2、 根据权利要求 1所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述根据判断结果, 向所 述终端发送 PTT通信建立响应, 包括: 2. The method according to claim 1, characterized in that, based on the judgment result, sending a PTT communication establishment response to the terminal includes:
如果所述终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之内, 向所述终端发送 PTT通 信建立响应, 所述 PTT通信建立响应中携带所述群组的群组标识、 所述群组 的预定义区域信息, 其中, 所述 PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信已建立消息 或 PTT通信允许建立消息。 If the terminal is located within the predefined area of the group, send a PTT communication establishment response to the terminal, where the PTT communication establishment response carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined definition of the group. Area information, wherein the PTT communication establishment response includes a PTT communication established message or a PTT communication allowed to be established message.
3、 根据权利要求 2所述的方法, 其特征在于, 如果所述终端位于所述群 组的预定义区域之内, 向所述终端发送 PTT通信建立响应具体包括: 3. The method according to claim 2, wherein if the terminal is located within a predefined area of the group, sending a PTT communication establishment response to the terminal specifically includes:
如果所述群组标识对应的群组的 PTT 通信已建立, 则向所述终端发送 PTT通信已建立消息; If the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier has been established, then sending a PTT communication established message to the terminal;
如果所述群组标识对应的群组的 PTT 通信未建立, 则向所述终端发送 PTT通信允许建立消息。 If the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier is not established, a PTT communication permission establishment message is sent to the terminal.
4、 根据权利要求 3所述的方法, 其特征在于, 如果所述群组标识对应的 群组的 PTT通信未建立, 则还包括: 4. The method according to claim 3, characterized in that, if the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier is not established, it further includes:
向所述群组的其它终端发送寻呼消息 , 所述寻呼消息中携带所述群组的 群组标识和所述群组的预定义区域信息; Send a paging message to other terminals of the group, where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group;
接收所述群组的其它终端发送的寻呼响应消息, 所述寻呼响应消息中携 带所述群组标识, 所述寻呼响应消息是所述其它终端在根据自身当前所在小 区的小区标识判断当前处于所述预定义区域之内后发送的。 Receive paging response messages sent by other terminals of the group. The paging response messages carry the group identifier. The paging response messages are determined by the other terminals based on the cell identifier of the cell where they are currently located. Sent after the current location is within the predefined area.
5、 根据权利要求 1所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述根据判断结果, 向所 述终端发送 PTT通信建立响应, 包括: 5. The method according to claim 1, characterized in that, based on the judgment result, sending a PTT communication establishment response to the terminal includes:
如果所述终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之外, 向所述终端发送 PTT通 信建立响应, 其中, 所述 PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信建立失败的消息。 If the terminal is located outside the predefined area of the group, send a PTT message to the terminal The PTT communication establishment response includes a message that the PTT communication establishment fails.
6、 根据权利要求 1〜5中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 当所述群组的 任一终端离开所述群组的预定义区域时, 所述方法还包括: 6. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein when any terminal of the group leaves the predefined area of the group, the method further includes:
接收所述离开的终端发送的离开预定义区域的消息, 所述离开预定义区 域的消息中携带所述离开的终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识; Receive a message leaving a predefined area sent by the leaving terminal, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identification of the leaving terminal and the group identification of the group;
将所述离开的终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。 The departing terminal is removed from the PTT communication of the group.
7、 根据权利要求 1〜6中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 当所述群组的 任一终端进入所述群组的预定义区域时, 所述方法还包括: 7. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein when any terminal of the group enters the predefined area of the group, the method further includes:
接收所述进入的终端发送的进入预定义区域的消息, 所述进入预定义区 域的消息中携带所述进入的终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识; Receive a message sent by the entering terminal to enter the predefined area, where the message entering the predefined area carries the terminal identification of the entering terminal and the group identification of the group;
将所述进入的终端加入所述群组的 PTT通信。 The incoming terminal is added to the PTT communication of the group.
8、 根据权利要求 1〜7中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 当所述群组的 任一终端欲结束 PPT通信时, 所述方法还包括: 8. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, characterized in that when any terminal of the group wants to end PPT communication, the method further includes:
接收所述欲结束 PPT通信的终端发送的呼叫结束请求; Receive the call end request sent by the terminal that wants to end the PPT communication;
向所述群组的所有终端发送呼叫结束消息, 以使所述群组的所有终端删 除所述群组的预定义区域信息。 Send a call end message to all terminals in the group, so that all terminals in the group delete the predefined area information of the group.
9、 一种 PTT通信方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 9. A PTT communication method, characterized by including:
终端向服务器发送 PTT通信建立请求,所述 PTT通信建立请求中携带群 组标识和所述终端当前所在小区的小区标识; The terminal sends a PTT communication establishment request to the server, and the PTT communication establishment request carries the group identification and the cell identification of the cell where the terminal is currently located;
接收所述服务器发送的 PTT通信建立响应,所述 PTT通信建立响应是所 述服务器根据所述群组标识对应的群组的预定义区域信息和所述终端当前所 在小区的小区标识, 判断所述终端是否位于所述群组的预定义区域内并根据 判断结果发送的; Receive a PTT communication establishment response sent by the server, where the PTT communication establishment response is based on the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identification and the cell identification of the cell where the terminal is currently located, and determine the Whether the terminal is located in the predefined area of the group and sent based on the judgment result;
根据所述 PPT通信建立响应, 确定是否加入所述群组的 PPT通信。 Determine whether to join the PPT communication of the group according to the PPT communication establishment response.
10、 根据权利要求 9所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述 PTT通信建立响应 是在所述服务器判断所述终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之外时发送的, 其 中所述 PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信建立失败的消息。 10. The method according to claim 9, wherein the PTT communication establishment response is sent when the server determines that the terminal is located outside the predefined area of the group, wherein the PTT communication The establishment response includes a message that the PTT communication establishment failed.
11、 根据权利要求 9所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述 PTT通信建立响应 是在所述服务器判断所述终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之内时发送的, 所 述 PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信已建立消息或 PTT通信允许建立消息, 且所述 PTT通信建立响应中携带所述群组标识、所述群组的预定义区域信息。 11. The method according to claim 9, wherein the PTT communication establishment response is sent when the server determines that the terminal is located within a predefined area of the group, and the PTT communication establishment response The response includes a PTT communication established message or a PTT communication allowed message, And the PTT communication establishment response carries the group identifier and predefined area information of the group.
12、 根据权利要求 11所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述接收所述服务器发 送的 ΡΤΤ通信建立响应之后, 还包括: 12. The method according to claim 11, characterized in that, after receiving the PTT communication establishment response sent by the server, further comprising:
保存所述群组的预定义区域信息。 Predefined area information for the group is saved.
13、 根据权利要求 12所述的方法, 其特征在于, 当所述终端移动时, 还 包括: 13. The method according to claim 12, characterized in that when the terminal moves, it further includes:
根据保存的预定义区域信息和所述终端移动至小区的小区标识判断所述 终端是否离开所述群组的预定义区域; Determine whether the terminal leaves the predefined area of the group based on the saved predefined area information and the cell identification of the cell to which the terminal moves;
当判断结果为是时, 向所述服务器发送离开预定义区域的消息, 所述离 开预定义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识和群组标识, 以使所述服务 器将所述终端移出所述群组的 ΡΤΤ通信。 When the judgment result is yes, a message leaving the predefined area is sent to the server. The message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identification and group identification of the terminal, so that the server moves the terminal out. PTT communications for the group.
14、 根据权利要求 13所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述向所述服务器发送 离开预定义区域的消息之后, 还包括: 14. The method according to claim 13, characterized in that, after sending the message of leaving the predefined area to the server, it further includes:
当所述终端再次移动时, 根据保存的预定义区域信息和所述终端移动至 小区的小区标识判断所述终端是否进入所述群组的预定义区域; When the terminal moves again, determine whether the terminal enters the predefined area of the group based on the saved predefined area information and the cell identification of the cell to which the terminal moves;
当判断结果为是时, 向所述服务器发送进入预定义区域的消息, 所述进 入预定义区域的消息中携带终端标识和群组标识, 以使所述服务器将所述终 端加入所述群组的 ΡΤΤ通信。 When the judgment result is yes, a message entering the predefined area is sent to the server. The message entering the predefined area carries the terminal identification and the group identification, so that the server adds the terminal to the group. PTTT Communications.
15、 根据权利要求 12所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述保存所述群组的预 定义区域信息之后, 还包括: 15. The method according to claim 12, wherein after saving the predefined area information of the group, it further includes:
接收所述服务器发送的呼叫结束消息 , 所述呼叫结束消息中携带所述群 组的群组标识; Receive a call end message sent by the server, where the call end message carries the group identifier of the group;
删除本地保存的所述群组的预定义区域信息。 Delete the locally saved predefined area information of the group.
16、 一种 ΡΤΤ通信方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 16. A PTT communication method, characterized by including:
服务器确定允许建立群组的 ΡΤΤ通信; The server determines that PTT communications to establish the group are allowed;
向所述群组的终端发送所述群组的 ΡΤΤ通信的寻呼消息, 所述寻呼消息 中携带所述群组标识和所述群组的预定义区域信息。 A paging message for PTT communication of the group is sent to the terminal of the group, where the paging message carries the group identifier and predefined area information of the group.
17、 根据权利要求 16所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述向所述群组的终端 发送所述群组的 ΡΤΤ通信的寻呼消息之后, 还包括: 17. The method according to claim 16, characterized in that, after sending the paging message of the PTT communication of the group to the terminal of the group, it further includes:
接收所述群组的终端发送的寻呼响应消息, 所述寻呼响应消息中携带所 述群组的群组标识, 所述寻呼响应消息是所述终端在根据自身当前小区的小 区标识判断当前处于所述预定义区域之内后发送的。 Receive a paging response message sent by a terminal of the group, where the paging response message carries The group identifier of the group, the paging response message is sent by the terminal after judging that it is currently within the predefined area based on the cell identifier of its current cell.
18、 根据权利要求 16或 17所述的方法, 其特征在于, 当所述群组的任 一终端离开所述群组的预定义区域时, 还包括: 18. The method according to claim 16 or 17, characterized in that when any terminal of the group leaves the predefined area of the group, it further includes:
接收所述离开的终端发送的离开预定义区域的消息, 所述离开预定义区 域的消息中携带所述离开的终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识; Receive a message leaving a predefined area sent by the leaving terminal, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identification of the leaving terminal and the group identification of the group;
将所述离开的终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。 The departing terminal is removed from the PTT communication of the group.
19、 根据权利要求 16〜18中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 当所述群 组的任一终端进入所述群组的预定义区域时, 还包括: 19. The method according to any one of claims 16 to 18, characterized in that when any terminal of the group enters the predefined area of the group, it further includes:
接收所述进入的终端发送的进入预定义区域的消息, 所述进入预定义区 域的消息中携带所述进入的终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识; Receive a message sent by the entering terminal to enter the predefined area, where the message entering the predefined area carries the terminal identification of the entering terminal and the group identification of the group;
将所述进入的终端加入所述群组的 PTT通信。 The incoming terminal is added to the PTT communication of the group.
20、 根据权利要求 16〜19中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 当所述群 组的任一终端欲结束 PPT通信时还包括: 20. The method according to any one of claims 16 to 19, characterized in that when any terminal of the group wants to end PPT communication, it also includes:
接收所述欲结束 PPT通信的终端发送的呼叫结束请求; Receive the call end request sent by the terminal that wants to end the PPT communication;
向所述群组的所有终端发送呼叫结束消息, 以使所述群组的所有终端删 除所述群组的预定义区域信息。 Send a call end message to all terminals in the group, so that all terminals in the group delete the predefined area information of the group.
21、 一种 PTT通信方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 21. A PTT communication method, characterized by including:
终端接收服务器发送的群组的 PTT通信的寻呼消息, 所述寻呼消息中携 带所述群组的群组标识和所述群组的预定义区域信息; The terminal receives a paging message for PTT communication of the group sent by the server, where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group;
对应所述群组标识, 保存所述群组的预定义区域信息。 Corresponding to the group identifier, predefined area information of the group is saved.
22、 根据权利要求 21所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述终端接收服务器发 送的群组的 PTT通信的寻呼消息之后, 还包括: 22. The method according to claim 21, wherein after the terminal receives the paging message of the group's PTT communication sent by the server, it further includes:
根据所述终端当前所在小区的小区标识和所述预定义区域信息判断当前 是否位于所述群组的预定义区域之内; Determine whether the terminal is currently located within the predefined area of the group according to the cell identifier of the cell where the terminal is currently located and the predefined area information;
如果所述终端当前位于所述群组的预定义区域之内, 向所述服务器发送 寻呼响应消息 , 所述寻呼响应消息中携带所述群组的群组标识。 If the terminal is currently located within the predefined area of the group, send a paging response message to the server, where the paging response message carries the group identifier of the group.
23、 根据权利要求 22所述的方法, 其特征在于, 如果所述终端当前位于 所述群组的预定义区域之外, 且所述终端移动之后, 还包括: 23. The method according to claim 22, characterized in that if the terminal is currently located outside the predefined area of the group and after the terminal moves, it further includes:
根据保存的预定义区域信息和所述终端移动至小区的小区标识确定所述 终端是否进入所述群组的预定义区域; The terminal is determined based on the saved predefined area information and the cell identifier of the cell to which the terminal moves. Whether the terminal enters the predefined area of the group;
当所述终端进入所述群组的预定义区域之内时, 向所述服务器发送进入 预定义区域的消息, 所述进入预定义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识 和所述群组的群组标识, 以使所述服务器将所述终端加入所述群组的 PTT通 信。 When the terminal enters the predefined area of the group, a message entering the predefined area is sent to the server, where the message entering the predefined area carries the terminal identification of the terminal and the group. group identification, so that the server adds the terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
24、 根据权利要求 22或 23所述的方法, 其特征在于, 当所述终端移动 时, 还包括: 24. The method according to claim 22 or 23, characterized in that when the terminal moves, it further includes:
根据保存的预定义区域信息和所述终端移动至小区的小区标识确定所述 终端是否离开所述群组的预定义区域; Determine whether the terminal leaves the predefined area of the group according to the saved predefined area information and the cell identification of the cell to which the terminal moves;
当所述终端离开所述群组的预定义区域时, 向所述服务器发送离开预定 义区域的消息, 所述离开预定义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识和所 述群组的群组标识, 以使所述服务器将所述终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。 When the terminal leaves the predefined area of the group, a message leaving the predefined area is sent to the server, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identification of the terminal and the group name of the group. Group identification, so that the server removes the terminal from the PTT communication of the group.
25、 根据权利要求 21〜24任一所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述接收服务 器发送的群组的 PTT通信的寻呼消息之后, 还包括: 25. The method according to any one of claims 21 to 24, characterized in that, after receiving the paging message of the group's PTT communication sent by the server, it further includes:
接收所述服务器发送的呼叫结束消息 , 所述呼叫结束消息中携带所述群 组的群组标识; Receive a call end message sent by the server, where the call end message carries the group identifier of the group;
删除本地保存的所述群组的预定义区域信息。 Delete the locally saved predefined area information of the group.
26、 一种服务器, 其特征在于, 包括: 26. A server, characterized by including:
接收模块, 用于接收终端发送的 PTT通信建立请求, 所述 PTT通信建立 请求中携带群组标识和所述终端当前所在小区的小区标识; A receiving module, configured to receive a PTT communication establishment request sent by the terminal, where the PTT communication establishment request carries a group identity and a cell identity of the cell where the terminal is currently located;
查询模块, 用于根据所述群组标识, 查询所述群组标识对应的群组的预 定义区域信息; A query module, configured to query the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identifier according to the group identifier;
判断模块, 用于根据查询到的预定义区域信息和所述终端当前所在小区 的小区标识, 判断所述终端是否位于所述群组的预定义区域内; A judgment module, configured to judge whether the terminal is located in the predefined area of the group based on the queried predefined area information and the cell identifier of the cell where the terminal is currently located;
发送模块, 用于根据判断结果, 向所述终端发送 PTT通信建立响应。 A sending module, configured to send a PTT communication establishment response to the terminal according to the judgment result.
27、 根据权利要求 26所述的服务器, 其特征在于, 当所述终端位于所述 群组的预定义区域之内时,所述 PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信已建立消息 或 PTT通信允许建立消息, 且所述 PTT通信建立响应中携带所述群组标识、 所述群组的预定义区域信息。 27. The server according to claim 26, wherein when the terminal is located within a predefined area of the group, the PTT communication establishment response includes a PTT communication established message or a PTT communication allowed establishment message. , and the PTT communication establishment response carries the group identifier and predefined area information of the group.
28、 根据权利要求 26所述的服务器, 其特征在于, 所述发送模块具体用 于: 28. The server according to claim 26, characterized in that the sending module specifically uses At:
如果所述群组标识对应的群组的 PTT 通信已建立, 则向所述终端发送 PTT通信已建立消息; If the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier has been established, then sending a PTT communication established message to the terminal;
如果所述群组标识对应的群组的 PTT 通信未建立, 则向所述终端发送 PTT通信允许建立消息。 If the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier is not established, a PTT communication permission establishment message is sent to the terminal.
29、根据权利要求 28所述的服务器,其特征在于,所述发送模块还用于: 如果所述群组标识对应的群组的 PTT通信未建立, 则向所述群组的其它 终端发送寻呼消息 , 所述寻呼消息中携带所述群组的群组标识和所述群组的 预定义区域信息; 29. The server according to claim 28, wherein the sending module is further configured to: if the PTT communication of the group corresponding to the group identifier is not established, send a search request to other terminals of the group. A paging message, the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group;
所述接收模块还用于, 接收所述群组的其它终端发送的寻呼响应消息, 所述寻呼响应消息中携带所述群组的群组标识, 所述寻呼响应消息是所述其 它终端在根据自身当前所在小区的小区标识判断当前处于所述预定义区域之 内后发送的。 The receiving module is also configured to receive paging response messages sent by other terminals of the group, where the paging response messages carry the group identifier of the group, and the paging response messages are the messages sent by other terminals of the group. The terminal sends it after judging that it is currently within the predefined area based on the cell identity of the cell where it is currently located.
30、 根据权利要求 26所述的服务器, 其特征在于, 当所述终端位于所述 群组的预定义区域之外时,所述 PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信建立失败的 消息。 30. The server according to claim 26, wherein when the terminal is located outside the predefined area of the group, the PTT communication establishment response includes a PTT communication establishment failure message.
31、 根据权利要求 26〜30中任一项所述的服务器, 其特征在于, 当所述 群组的任一终端离开所述群组的预定义区域时, 31. The server according to any one of claims 26 to 30, characterized in that when any terminal of the group leaves the predefined area of the group,
所述接收模块, 还用于接收所述离开的终端发送的离开预定义区域的消 息, 所述离开预定义区域的消息中携带所述离开的终端的终端标识和所述群 组的群组标识; The receiving module is also configured to receive a message leaving a predefined area sent by the leaving terminal, where the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identification of the leaving terminal and the group identification of the group. ;
所述服务器还包括: 移出模块, 用于将所述离开的终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。 The server further includes: a removal module, configured to remove the departing terminal from the PTT communication of the group.
32、 根据权利要求 26〜31 中任一项所述的服务器, 其特征在于, 当所述 群组的任一终端进入所述群组的预定义区域时, 32. The server according to any one of claims 26 to 31, characterized in that when any terminal of the group enters the predefined area of the group,
所述接收模块, 还用于接收所述进入的终端发送的进入预定义区域的消 息, 所述进入预定义区域的消息中携带所述进入的终端的终端标识和所述群 组的群组标识; The receiving module is also configured to receive a message sent by the entering terminal to enter the predefined area, where the message entering the predefined area carries the terminal identification of the entering terminal and the group identification of the group. ;
所述服务器还包括: 加入模块, 用于将所述进入的终端加入所述群组的 PTT通信。 The server further includes: a joining module, configured to add the incoming terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
33、 根据权利要求 26〜32中任一项所述的服务器, 其特征在于, 当所述 群组的任一终端欲结束 PPT通信时, 33. The server according to any one of claims 26 to 32, characterized in that when any terminal of the group wants to end PPT communication,
所述接收模块, 还用于接收所述欲结束 PPT通信的终端发送呼叫结束请 求; The receiving module is also used to receive a call end request sent by the terminal that wants to end the PPT communication;
所述发送模块, 还用于向所述群组的所有终端发送呼叫结束消息, 以使 所述群组的所有终端删除所述群组的预定义区域信息。 The sending module is also configured to send a call end message to all terminals in the group, so that all terminals in the group delete the predefined area information of the group.
34、 一种终端, 其特征在于, 包括: 34. A terminal, characterized by including:
发送模块, 用于向服务器发送 PTT通信建立请求, 所述 PTT通信建立请 求中携带群组标识和所述终端当前所在小区的小区标识; A sending module, configured to send a PTT communication establishment request to the server, where the PTT communication establishment request carries the group identity and the cell identity of the cell where the terminal is currently located;
接收模块, 用于接收所述服务器发送的 PTT通信建立响应, 所述 PTT通 信建立响应是所述服务器根据所述群组标识对应的群组的预定义区域信息和 所述终端当前所在小区的小区标识, 判断所述终端是否位于所述群组的预定 义区域内并根据判断结果发送的; A receiving module, configured to receive a PTT communication establishment response sent by the server, where the PTT communication establishment response is the predefined area information of the group corresponding to the group identification by the server and the cell of the cell where the terminal is currently located. Identification, which is sent by judging whether the terminal is located in the predefined area of the group and based on the judgment result;
处理模块, 用于根据所述 PPT通信建立响应, 确定是否加入所述 PPT通 信。 A processing module, configured to establish a response based on the PPT communication and determine whether to join the PPT communication.
35、 根据权利要求 34所述的终端, 其特征在于, 当所述 PTT通信建立 响应是在所述服务器判断所述终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之外时发送的 时, 所述 PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信建立失败的消息。 35. The terminal according to claim 34, wherein when the PTT communication establishment response is sent when the server determines that the terminal is located outside the predefined area of the group, the PTT The communication establishment response includes a message that PTT communication establishment failed.
36、 根据权利要求 34所述的终端, 其特征在于, 当所述 PTT通信建立 响应是在所述服务器判断所述终端位于所述群组的预定义区域之内时发送的 时, 所述 PTT通信建立响应包括 PTT通信已建立消息和 PTT通信允许建立 消息, 且携带所述群组标识、 所述群组的预定义区域信息。 36. The terminal according to claim 34, wherein when the PTT communication establishment response is sent when the server determines that the terminal is located within a predefined area of the group, the PTT The communication establishment response includes a PTT communication established message and a PTT communication allowed to be established message, and carries the group identifier and predefined area information of the group.
37、 根据权利要求 36所述的终端, 其特征在于, 还包括: 37. The terminal according to claim 36, further comprising:
存储模块, 用于保存所述群组的预定义区域信息。 A storage module configured to save predefined area information of the group.
38、 根据权利要求 37所述的终端, 其特征在于, 还包括: 38. The terminal according to claim 37, further comprising:
区域监控模块, 用于当所述终端移动时, 根据保存的预定义区域信息和 所述终端移动至小区的小区标识判断所述终端是否离开所述群组的预定义区 域; An area monitoring module, configured to determine whether the terminal leaves the predefined area of the group based on the saved predefined area information and the cell identification of the cell to which the terminal moves when the terminal moves;
所述发送模块还用于, 若所述区域监控模块判断所述终端离开所述群组 的预定义区域, 则, 向所述服务器发送离开预定义区域的消息, 所述离开预 定义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识, 以使所 述服务器将所述终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。 The sending module is also configured to, if the area monitoring module determines that the terminal leaves the predefined area of the group, send a message leaving the predefined area to the server, and the leaving predefined area The message defining the area carries the terminal identification of the terminal and the group identification of the group, so that the server moves the terminal out of the PTT communication of the group.
39、 根据权利要求 38所述的终端, 其特征在于, 所述区域监控模块还用 于, 当所述终端再次移动时, 根据保存的预定义区域信息和所述终端移动至 小区的小区标识判断判断所述终端是否进入所述群组的预定义区域; 39. The terminal according to claim 38, wherein the area monitoring module is further configured to, when the terminal moves again, determine according to the saved predefined area information and the cell identifier of the cell to which the terminal moves. Determine whether the terminal enters a predefined area of the group;
所述发送模块还用于, 若所述区域监控模块判断所述终端进入所述群组 的预定义区域, 则向所述服务器发送进入预定义区域的消息, 所述进入预定 义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识, 以使所述 服务器将所述终端加入所述群组的 PTT通信。 The sending module is also configured to, if the area monitoring module determines that the terminal enters the predefined area of the group, send a message of entering the predefined area to the server, in the message of entering the predefined area. The terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group are carried, so that the server adds the terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
40、 根据权利要求 37所述的终端, 其特征在于, 40. The terminal according to claim 37, characterized in that,
所述接收模块还用于, 接收所述服务器发送的呼叫结束消息, 所述呼叫 结束消息中携带所述群组的群组标识; The receiving module is also configured to receive a call end message sent by the server, where the call end message carries the group identifier of the group;
还包括: 删除模块, 用于删除本地保存的所述群组的预定义区域信息。 It also includes: a deletion module, configured to delete the locally saved predefined area information of the group.
41、 一种服务器, 其特征在于, 包括: 41. A server, characterized by including:
处理模块, 用于确定允许建立群组的 PTT通信; A processing module, used to determine the PTT communication that is allowed to establish the group;
发送模块,用于向所述群组的终端发送所述群组的 PTT通信的寻呼消息, 所述寻呼消息中携带所述群组的群组标识和所述群组的预定义区域信息。 A sending module configured to send a paging message for PTT communication of the group to the terminal of the group, where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group. .
42、 根据权利要求 41所述的服务器, 其特征在于, 还包括: 42. The server according to claim 41, further comprising:
接收模块, 用于接收所述群组的终端发送的寻呼响应消息, 所述寻呼响 应消息中携带所述群组的群组标识, 所述寻呼响应消息是所述终端在根据自 身当前小区的小区标识判断当前处于所述预定义区域之内后发送的。 A receiving module, configured to receive a paging response message sent by a terminal of the group, where the paging response message carries a group identifier of the group, and the paging response message is a response of the terminal according to its current The cell identifier of the cell is sent after it is determined that the cell is currently within the predefined area.
43、 根据权利要求 42所述的服务器, 其特征在于, 当所述群组的任一终 端离开所述群组的预定义区域时, 所述接收模块还用于, 接收所述离开的终 端发送的离开预定义区域的消息, 所述离开预定义区域的消息中携带所述离 开的终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识; 43. The server according to claim 42, wherein when any terminal of the group leaves the predefined area of the group, the receiving module is further configured to receive the message sent by the leaving terminal. A message leaving the predefined area, the message leaving the predefined area carries the terminal identification of the leaving terminal and the group identification of the group;
所述服务器还包括: 移出模块, 用于将所述离开的终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。 The server further includes: a removal module, configured to remove the departing terminal from the PTT communication of the group.
44、 根据权利要求 41〜43中任一项所述的服务器, 其特征在于, 当所述 群组的任一终端进入所述群组的预定义区域时, 所述接收模块还用于, 接收 所述进入的终端发送的进入预定义区域的消息, 所述进入预定义区域的消息 中携带所述进入的终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识; 44. The server according to any one of claims 41 to 43, wherein when any terminal of the group enters the predefined area of the group, the receiving module is also used to receive The message entering the predefined area sent by the entering terminal, the message entering the predefined area carries the terminal identification of the incoming terminal and the group identification of the group;
所述服务器还包括: 加入模块, 将所述进入的终端加入所述群组的 PTT 通信。 The server also includes: a joining module, adding the incoming terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
45、 根据权利要求 41〜44中任一项所述的服务器, 其特征在于, 当所述 群组的任一终端欲结束 PPT通信时, 45. The server according to any one of claims 41 to 44, characterized in that when any terminal of the group wants to end PPT communication,
所述接收模块还用于, 在所述接收所述欲结束 PPT通信的终端发送的寻 呼响应消息之后, 接收所述群组的终端发送的呼叫结束请求; The receiving module is also configured to, after receiving the paging response message sent by the terminal that wants to end the PPT communication, receive a call end request sent by the terminal of the group;
所述发送模块还用于, 向所述群组的所有终端发送呼叫结束消息, 以使 所述群组的所有终端删除所述群组的预定义区域信息。 The sending module is also configured to send a call end message to all terminals in the group, so that all terminals in the group delete the predefined area information of the group.
46、 一种终端, 其特征在于, 包括: 46. A terminal, characterized in that it includes:
接收模块, 用于接收服务器发送的群组的 PTT通信的寻呼消息, 所述寻 呼消息中携带所述群组的群组标识和所述群组的预定义区域信息; A receiving module, configured to receive a paging message for PTT communication of the group sent by the server, where the paging message carries the group identifier of the group and the predefined area information of the group;
存储模块, 用于对应所述群组标识, 保存所述群组的预定义区域信息。 A storage module, configured to correspond to the group identifier and store predefined area information of the group.
47、 根据权利要求 46所述的终端, 其特征在于, 还包括: 47. The terminal according to claim 46, further comprising:
区域监控模块, 用于根据所述终端的当前小区的小区标识和所述预定义 区域信息判断所述终端当前是否位于所述群组的预定义区域之内; An area monitoring module, configured to determine whether the terminal is currently located within the predefined area of the group based on the cell identifier of the current cell of the terminal and the predefined area information;
发送模块, 用于如果所述终端当前位于所述群组的预定义区域之内, 则 向所述服务器发送寻呼响应消息 , 所述寻呼响应消息中携带所述群组的群组 标识。 A sending module, configured to send a paging response message to the server if the terminal is currently located within a predefined area of the group, where the paging response message carries the group identifier of the group.
48、 根据权利要求 47所述的终端, 其特征在于, 所述区域监控模块还用 于, 如果所述终端当前位于所述群组的预定义区域之外, 且所述终端移动之 后, 根据保存的预定义区域信息和所述终端移动至小区的小区标识确定所述 终端是否进入所述群组的预定义区域; 48. The terminal according to claim 47, wherein the area monitoring module is further configured to: if the terminal is currently located outside the predefined area of the group and after the terminal moves, according to the saved The predefined area information and the cell identity of the cell to which the terminal moves are used to determine whether the terminal enters the predefined area of the group;
所述发送模块还用于, 当所述区域监控模块确定所述终端进入所述群组 的预定义区域时, 向所述服务器发送进入预定义区域的消息, 所述进入预定 义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识, 以使所述 服务器将所述终端加入所述群组的 PTT通信。 The sending module is also configured to, when the area monitoring module determines that the terminal enters the predefined area of the group, send a message of entering the predefined area to the server, in the message of entering the predefined area. The terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group are carried, so that the server adds the terminal to the PTT communication of the group.
49、 根据权利要求 47或 48所述的终端, 其特征在于, 所述区域监控模 块还用于, 在所述发送模块向所述服务器发送进入预定义区域的消息, 或所 述向所述服务器发送寻呼响应消息之后, 当所述终端移动时, 根据保存的预 定义区域信息和所述终端移动至小区的小区标识确定所述终端是否离开所述 群组的预定义区域; 49. The terminal according to claim 47 or 48, wherein the area monitoring module is further configured to: in the sending module, send a message entering a predefined area to the server, or send a message to the server to the server. After sending the paging response message, when the terminal moves, according to the saved preset defining area information and a cell identity of the cell to which the terminal moves to determine whether the terminal leaves the predefined area of the group;
所述发送模块还用于, 当所述区域监控模块确定所述终端离开所述群组 的预定义区域时, 向所述服务器发送离开预定义区域的消息, 所述离开预定 义区域的消息中携带所述终端的终端标识和所述群组的群组标识, 以使所述 服务器将所述终端移出所述群组的 PTT通信。 The sending module is also configured to: when the area monitoring module determines that the terminal leaves the predefined area of the group, send a message leaving the predefined area to the server, in which the message leaving the predefined area The terminal identifier of the terminal and the group identifier of the group are carried, so that the server moves the terminal out of the PTT communication of the group.
50、 根据权利要求 46〜49任一所述的终端, 其特征在于, 50. The terminal according to any one of claims 46 to 49, characterized in that,
所述接收模块还用于, 在所述接收服务器发送的群组的 PTT通信的寻呼 消息之后, 接收所述服务器发送的呼叫结束消息, 所述呼叫结束消息中携带 所述群组的群组标识; The receiving module is also configured to, after receiving the paging message of the PTT communication of the group sent by the server, receive a call end message sent by the server, where the call end message carries the group name of the group. logo;
还包括: 删除模块, 用于删除本地保存的所述群组的预定义区域信息。 It also includes: a deletion module, configured to delete the locally saved predefined area information of the group.
51、 一种通信系统, 其特征在于, 包括: 如权利要求 26〜33中任一项所述 的服务器、 一个如权利要求 34〜40中任一项所述的终端以及至少一个如权利 要求 46〜50中任一项所述的终端。 51. A communication system, characterized in that it includes: a server according to any one of claims 26 to 33, a terminal according to any one of claims 34 to 40, and at least one terminal according to claim 46 Any of ~50 terminals.
52、 一种通信系统, 其特征在于, 包括: 如权利要求 41〜45任一项所述 的服务器以及至少一个如权利要求 46〜50中任一项所述的终端。 52. A communication system, characterized in that it includes: a server according to any one of claims 41 to 45 and at least one terminal according to any one of claims 46 to 50.
PCT/CN2012/087555 2012-12-26 2012-12-26 Ptt communication method, server, terminal and system WO2014101008A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2012/087555 WO2014101008A1 (en) 2012-12-26 2012-12-26 Ptt communication method, server, terminal and system
CN201280025003.XA CN103843373B (en) 2012-12-26 2012-12-26 PTT communication means, server, terminal and system

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2012/087555 WO2014101008A1 (en) 2012-12-26 2012-12-26 Ptt communication method, server, terminal and system

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2014101008A1 true WO2014101008A1 (en) 2014-07-03

Family

ID=50804816

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2012/087555 WO2014101008A1 (en) 2012-12-26 2012-12-26 Ptt communication method, server, terminal and system

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN103843373B (en)
WO (1) WO2014101008A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104469697A (en) * 2014-11-10 2015-03-25 北京佳讯飞鸿电气股份有限公司 Method for achieving automatic dial-back and participating in group calling

Families Citing this family (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105656968A (en) * 2014-11-21 2016-06-08 哈尔滨海能达科技有限公司 Cluster communication system, user equipment thereof, control device and dynamic group calling method
CN106535135A (en) * 2015-09-10 2017-03-22 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Cluster service realizing method and device
CN112996082B (en) * 2019-12-16 2023-03-28 成都鼎桥通信技术有限公司 Method, device and equipment for joint grouping and readable storage medium
CN113473390B (en) * 2020-03-30 2023-03-14 成都鼎桥通信技术有限公司 Method for establishing area group, user equipment and storage medium

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101060716A (en) * 2006-06-23 2007-10-24 华为技术有限公司 Group call method and group call register for the third generation partner program network
CN101335929A (en) * 2006-11-30 2008-12-31 萨甘股份有限公司 Method and device for determining a group call newly distributed by at least one base station of a cellular telephony system
CN101345911A (en) * 2007-07-10 2009-01-14 华为技术有限公司 Method, terminal and system for reinforcing railway urgent call

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20050143056A1 (en) * 2003-12-31 2005-06-30 Iyer Prakash R. Method and apparatus for providing push-to-talk services in a cellular communication system
CN101262653A (en) * 2008-04-14 2008-09-10 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Dynamic repacking method for digital cluster system

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101060716A (en) * 2006-06-23 2007-10-24 华为技术有限公司 Group call method and group call register for the third generation partner program network
CN101335929A (en) * 2006-11-30 2008-12-31 萨甘股份有限公司 Method and device for determining a group call newly distributed by at least one base station of a cellular telephony system
CN101345911A (en) * 2007-07-10 2009-01-14 华为技术有限公司 Method, terminal and system for reinforcing railway urgent call

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104469697A (en) * 2014-11-10 2015-03-25 北京佳讯飞鸿电气股份有限公司 Method for achieving automatic dial-back and participating in group calling

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN103843373A (en) 2014-06-04
CN103843373B (en) 2018-06-05

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP3764671B1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
US11627628B2 (en) Packet transmission method, apparatus, and system
US20150016421A1 (en) System and method for transitioning a communication session between networks that are not commonly controlled
WO2013170650A1 (en) Trunked service realization system and device
WO2018027995A1 (en) Paging method and paging device
WO2020001562A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2014101008A1 (en) Ptt communication method, server, terminal and system
WO2014187289A1 (en) Short-range communication method, user equipment, and mobile management entity
JP2020501445A (en) Access processing method, base station and mobile communication terminal
CN109845216A (en) A kind of communication means and device
WO2014139234A1 (en) Mobile communication method, mobile communication server, and mobile communication system
WO2010088835A1 (en) Method and system for realizing local switch
WO2015018232A1 (en) Device-to-device connection management method and apparatus, and base station
WO2014166440A1 (en) Cluster relay method, device, system and storage medium
WO2013149428A1 (en) Method for realizing switching to device-to-device communication mode, network apparatus and user equipment
WO2013107216A1 (en) Td-lte digital trunking communications system and group service realization method
WO2023124482A1 (en) Service authentication method and apparatus, and device, system and medium
WO2018170707A1 (en) Control plane connection management method and device
WO2017088550A1 (en) Method and device for enabling terminal to access network
WO2021047454A1 (en) Location information acquisition method, location service configuration method, and communication device
WO2015096072A1 (en) Method, apparatus and system for establishing cooperative communication
WO2009025252A1 (en) METHOD FOR PROCESSING OF EMERGENCY SERVICE OF IP-BASED IN WiMAX
WO2018157646A1 (en) File transmission method, device and system
EP4106398A1 (en) Parameter configuration method, apparatus and system, device and storage medium
WO2021208059A1 (en) Connection establishment method and apparatus, device and storage medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 12890769

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 12890769

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1